323-1701-210.2.r11.2

565/5100/5200

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 Release 11.2 What’s inside... Connecting power Installing peripheral cables Installing circuit packs Fiber management Cleaning connectors Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste

See Part 1 for the following: Observing safety guidelines Preparing for installation Installing a rack (19-inch or 23-inch) Installing 5100 shelves and equipment

323-1701-210 - Issue 2 Standard September 2012 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation. All rights reserved.

Ciena® Confidential and Proprietary

LEGAL NOTICES THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN. EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE. While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice. Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of America and other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means, altered in any fashion, or stored in a data base or retrieval system, without express written permission of the Ciena Corporation. Security Ciena® cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or credit for unauthorized use or access. Contacting Ciena Corporate Headquarters

410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144

www.ciena.com

Customer Technical Support/Warranty In North America

1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224) 410-865-4961

In Europe, Middle East, and Africa

800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247) +44-207-012-5508

In Asia-Pacific

800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247) +81-3-6367-3989 +91-124-4340-600

In Caribbean and Latin America

800-CIENA-24-7 (800-2436-2247) 410-865-4944 (USA)

Sales and General Information

410-694-5700

E-mail: [email protected]

In North America

410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714

E-mail: [email protected]

In Europe

+44-207-012-5500 (UK)

E-mail: [email protected]

In Asia

+81-3-3248-4680 (Japan)

E-mail: [email protected]

In India

+91-124-434-0500

E-mail: [email protected]

011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City)

E-mail: [email protected]

877-CIENA-TD (243-6283) or 410-865-8996

E-mail: [email protected]

In Latin America Training

For additional office locations and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

IMPORTANT: PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING CIENA CORPORATION ("Ciena") SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DOCUMENTATION (COLLECTIVELY, THE "EQUIPMENT"). BY INSTALLING OR USING THE EQUIPMENT, YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. 1. Right to Use License; Restrictions. Subject to these terms, and the payment of all applicable license fees, Ciena grants to you, as end user, a non-exclusive license to use the Ciena software (the "Software") in object code form solely in connection with, and as embedded within, the Equipment,. You shall have the right to use the Software solely for your own internal use and benefit. You may make one copy of the Software and documentation solely for backup and archival purpose, however you must reproduce and affix all copyright and other proprietary rights notices that appear in or on the original. You may not, without Ciena's prior written consent, (i) sublicense, assign, sell, rent, lend, lease, transfer or otherwise distribute the Software; (ii) grant any rights in the Software or documentation not expressly authorized herein; (iii) modify the Software nor provide any third person the means to do the same; (iv) create derivative works, translate, disassemble, recompile, reverse engineer or attempt to obtain the source code of the Software in any way; or (v) alter, destroy, or otherwise remove any proprietary notices or labels on or embedded within the Software or documentation. You acknowledge that this license is subject to Section 365 of the U.S. Bankruptcy Code and requires Ciena's consent to any assignment related to a bankruptcy proceeding. Sole title to the Software and documentation, to any derivative works, and to any associated patents and copyrights, remains with Ciena or its licensors. Ciena reserves to itself and its licensors all rights in the Software and documentation not expressly granted to you. You shall preserve intact any notice of copyright, trademark, logo, legend or other notice of ownership from any original or copies of the Software or documentation. 2. Audit: Upon Ciena's reasonable request, but not more frequently than annually without reasonable cause, you shall permit Ciena to audit the use of the Software at such times as may be mutually agreed upon to ensure compliance with this Agreement. 3. Confidentiality. You agree that you will receive confidential or proprietary information ("Confidential Information") in connection with the purchase, deployment and use of the Equipment. You will not disclose Confidential Information to any third party without prior written consent of Ciena, will use it only for purposes for which it was disclosed, use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software from unauthorized disclosure or use, and must treat it with the same degree of care as you do your own similar information, but with no less than reasonable care. You acknowledge that the design and structure of the Software constitute trade secrets and/or copyrighted materials of Ciena and agree that the Equipment is Confidential Information for purposes of this Agreement. 4. U.S. Government Use. The Software is provided to the Government only with restricted rights and limited rights. Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 52-227-14 and 52-227-19 or DFARS Section 52.227-7013(C)(1)(ii), as applicable. The Equipment and any accompanying technical data (collectively "Materials") are commercial within the meaning of applicable Federal acquisition regulations. These Materials were developed fully at private expense. U.S. Government use of the Materials is restricted by this Agreement, and all other U.S. Government use is prohibited. In accordance with FAR 12.212 and DFAR Supplement 227.7202, software delivered to you is commercial computer software and the use of that software is further restricted by this Agreement. 5. Term of License. This license is effective until terminated. Customer may terminate this license at any time by giving written notice to Ciena [or] and destroying or erasing all copies of Software including any documentation. Ciena may terminate this Agreement and your license to the Software immediately by giving you written notice of termination in the event that either (i) you breach any term or condition of this Agreement or (ii) you are wound up other than voluntarily for the purposes of amalgamation or reorganization, have a receiver appointed or enter into liquidation or bankruptcy or analogous process in your home country. Termination shall be without prejudice to any other rights or remedies Ciena may have. In the event of any termination you will have no right to keep or use the Software or any copy of the Software for any purpose and you shall destroy and erase all copies of such Software in its possession or control, and forward written certification to Ciena that all such copies of Software have been destroyed or erased.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6. Compliance with laws. You agree to comply with all applicable laws, including all import regulations, and to obtain all required licenses and permits related to installation and use of Equipment. Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Software. 7. Limitation of Liability. ANY LIABILITY OF Ciena SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE AMOUNTS PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MISREPRESENTATION AND OTHER TORTS. THE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION ALSO APPLY TO ANY THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER OF Ciena. NEITHER Ciena NOR ANY OF ITS THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INJURY, LOSS OR DAMAGE, WHETHER INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, CONTRACTS, DATA OR PROGRAMS, AND THE COST OF RECOVERING SUCH DATA OR PROGRAMS, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN ADVANCE 8. General. Ciena may assign this Agreement to any Ciena affiliate or to a purchaser of the intellectual property rights in the Software, but otherwise neither this Agreement nor any rights hereunder may be assigned nor duties delegated by either party, and any attempt to do so will be void. This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Maryland (without regard to the conflict of laws provisions) and shall be enforceable in the courts of Maryland. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply hereto. This Agreement constitutes the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties relating to the license for the Software and supersedes all proposals, communications, purchase orders, and prior agreements, verbal or written, between the parties. If any portion hereof is found to be void or unenforceable, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

v

Contents

0

About this document

ix

Connecting power

5-1

List of procedures 5-1 Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) 5-6 5-2 Connecting power on a 5100 AC power shelf (NTPM50BA) 5-19 5-3 Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS rectifier 5-26 5-4 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier 5-30 5-5 Connecting alternating current power to a 1U APRS rectifier 5-37 5-6 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 1U APRS module 5-40 5-7 Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk Switch 5-45 5-8 Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf 5-49 5-9 Connecting power to a Breaker Interface Panel (NTN458RA) 5-57 5-10 Connecting power to an Ethernet hub 5-63 5-11 Connecting power to the Equipment Inventory Unit 5-68 5-12 Testing 5100 shelf power connections 5-72

Installing peripheral cables

6-1

List of procedures 6-1 Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system 6-5 6-2 Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS rectifier 6-11 6-3 Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier 6-13 6-4 Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable 6-18 6-5 Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology) 6-21 6-6 Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology) 6-26 6-7 Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5100 shelf using an Ethernet cable 6-32 6-8 Connecting to a data communications network 6-35 6-9 Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk Switch 6-37 6-10 Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch 6-40 6-11 Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel 6-45 6-12 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations 6-61

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

vi Contents 6-13 6-14

Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations 6-67 Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel 6-71

Installing circuit packs

7-1

Handling circuit packs 7-2

List of procedures 7-1 Inserting circuit packs in a 5100 shelf 7-4 7-2 Installing an ETS Comms module in an ETS shelf 7-9 7-3 Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf 7-11 7-4 Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules 7-15 7-5 Inserting filler cards 7-25

Fiber management

8-1

List of procedures 8-1 Labeling cables and optical fibers 8-6 8-2 Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager 8-10 8-3 Guidelines for routing fiber in a drawer equipped with tray assemblies 8-15 8-4 Routing fibers for optical circuit packs 8-20 8-5 Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack 8-23 8-6 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM 8-35 8-7 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz 8-40 8-8 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM 8-46 8-9 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps 8-52 8-10 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM 8-60 8-11 Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz 8-71 8-12 Routing fibers for the OSC tray 8-77 8-13 Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps 8-80 8-14 Installing a 90-degree bootclip to a patch cord boot (for Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel, only) 8-84 8-15 Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray 8-86 8-16 Routing fibers for the patch panel 8-93 8-17 Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler 8-104 8-18 Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA 8-108 8-19 Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer 8-112 8-20 Routing fibers for the Optical Trunk Switch 8-118 8-21 Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch 8-120

Cleaning connectors

9-1

Cleaning zones 9-1

List of procedures 9-1 Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex) 9-8 9-2 Cleaning MT-RJ connectors 9-12 565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Contents vii 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6

Cleaning MPO connectors 9-14 Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs 9-16 Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing 9-20 Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end 9-26

Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste

10-1

Overview 10-1 Guidelines 10-2 Illustrations 10-3 Compression lugs and cables 10-3 Surfaces 10-5

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

viii Contents

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

ix

About this document

0

ATTENTION This document is presented in two parts: Part 1 and Part 2. Each part has its own table of contents. The table of contents in Part 1 contains topics found in Part 1 only. The table of contents in Part 2 contains topics found in Part 2 only. Part 2 continues sequential chapter numbering from Part 1. You are reading Part 2 of Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, 323-1701-210. This document provides the installation procedures for 565/5100/5200 Advanced Services Platform (565/5100/5200) hardware, specifically for 5100. Unless specifically stated otherwise, references to Release 11.2 in the 565/5100/5200 technical publications apply to Release 11.2 and Release 11.21. The 565/5100/5200 includes the following shelves: •

5200 shelf

•

5100 shelf

•

565 shelf

Unless specified otherwise, 565/5100/5200 is used throughout the technical publications to cover any of the three different shelf variants. Part 1 of Installing 5100 Shelves and Components includes: Chapter 1, “Observing safety guidelines” Chapter 2, “Preparing for installation” Chapter 3, “Installing a rack (19-inch or 23-inch)” Chapter 4, “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment”

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

x About this document

Part 2 of Installing 5100 Shelves and Components includes: Chapter 5, “Connecting power” Chapter 6, “Installing peripheral cables” Chapter 7, “Installing circuit packs” Chapter 8, “Fiber management” Chapter 9, “Cleaning connectors” Chapter 10, “Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste” This document contains the following information for the 5100: •

safety guidelines

•

preparing for installation

•

installing shelves and equipment

•

connecting power

•

installing peripheral cables

•

installing circuit packs

•

fiber management

•

cleaning connectors

Audience for this document This document is intended for the following audience: •

strategic and current planners

•

provisioners

•

installers

•

transmission standards engineers

•

field maintenance engineers

•

system line-up and testing (SLAT) personnel

•

maintenance technicians

•

network administrators

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

About this document xi

Documentation library for the 565/5100/5200 The documentation library consists of the 565/5100/5200 Technical Publications.

Technical Publications The 565/5100/5200 Technical Publications consist of descriptive information and procedures. Descriptive information

These documents provide detailed descriptive information about the 565/5100/5200, including: •

system description

•

software descriptions

•

hardware descriptions

•

technical specifications

•

ordering information

•

TL1 user information

Procedures

These documents contain all procedures required to install, provision, and maintain the 565/5100/5200 system.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

xii About this document

The following roadmap lists the documents in the 565/5100/5200 library. OM3923

Planning a Network

Planning Guide (NTY410AS) About the 565/5100/5200 Library (323-1701-090) Network Planning and Link Engineering Part 1 (323-1701-110) Network Planning and Link Engineering Part 2 (323-1701-110) Network Planning and Link Engineering Part 3 (323-1701-110)

Installing, Commissioning and Testing a Network

Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 1 (323-1701-201) Installing 5200 Shelves and Components, Part 2 (323-1701-201) Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 1 (323-1701-210) Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 (323-1701-210)

Software and User Interface, Part 1 (323-1701-101)

Installing 565 Shelves and Components, (323-1701-215)

Software and User Interface, Part 2 (323-1701-101)

Commissioning Procedures (323-1701-220)

Hardware Description Part 1 (323-1701-102)

Connection Procedures Part 1 (323-1701-221)

Hardware Description Part 2 (323-1701-102)

Connection Procedures Part 2 (323-1701-221)

Technical Specifications (323-1701-180)

Testing and Equalization Procedures (323-1701-222)

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Managing, Provisioning and Testing a Network

Provisioning and Operating Procedures Part 1 (323-1701-310) Provisioning and Operating Procedures Part 2 (323-1701-310) Customer Acceptance Testing Procedures (323-1701-330) TL1 Interface, Part 1 (323-1701-190) TL1 Interface, Part 2 (323-1701-190) TL1 Interface, Part 3 (323-1701-190) TL1 Interface, Part 4 (323-1701-190)

Maintaining and Troubleshooting a Network

Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, Part 1 (323-1701-542) Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, Part 2 (323-1701-542)

Supporting documentation for 565/5100/5200 Library 565/5100/5200 Data Application Guide (NTRN15EA) Network Security Dashboard User Guide (323-1421-199) FIPS Security Policy for 565/5100/5200 (NT0H64BA)

Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, Part 3 (323-1701-542) Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, Part 4 (323-1701-542) Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, Part 5 (323-1701-542) Maintenance and Replacement Procedures (323-1701-546)

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-1

Connecting power

5-

Use the procedures in this chapter to make all the required power connections for components of the 5100 shelf.

Before you begin Before you begin the procedures in this chapter, make sure that you have completed the procedures in the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter in this Part 1 of this book. The 565/5100/5200 system is intended for use in isolated DC return (DC-I) applications, as there are no features within the system to bond the DC return to framework/office ground.

Requirements Table 5-1 lists the tools and materials required to complete the procedures in this chapter. Table 5-1 Tools and materials required to make power connections to a shelf Item

Quantity

Supplied

Volt-ohm-multimeter (VOM)

1

no

Wire crimper

1

no

Wire strippers

1

no

Phillips No. 1 screwdriver

1

no

Phillips No. 2 screwdriver

1

no

Phillips No. 8 pan head screws 8-32 x 1/4-inch

4

yes

Slot screwdriver 3/32-inch

1

no

Cable ties and lacing cord

As required

no

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-2 Connecting power Table 5-1 (Continued) Tools and materials required to make power connections to a shelf Item

Quantity

Supplied

Single-hole (No. 6 screw) ring lugs for 12, 14, 16 or 18 AWG copper wire, depending on the powering wire size used (for the ETS powering connections)

8

no

Dual-hole ring lug for 10 AWG copper wire (for the ground connection to ETS dual ground connector)

2

yes, 1 already installed on the ETS shelf, and the other 1 part of the ETS installation kit

10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see Note 1 and Note 2) As required (Used to make dc power connections between a 3U APRS rectifier module and a and a breaker interface panel.)

no

12 AWG insulated stranded copper wire

no

As required

1U APRS dc output cable 4 (Used to make dc power connections between the rectifier module and the shelf.)

√

yes

18 AWG (0.8 mm2, minimum size), 16 AWG, 14 AWG or 12 AWG 4 wires for the no (3.00 mm2, maximum size) insulated stranded or solid copper wire power (minimum) (for ETS power connection) connections 10 AWG (5 mm2) insulated stranded copper wire (for the ETS grounding connection)

1 wire for the grounding connection

AC power cable with an IEC 60320-C19 (male) connector (used to connect the ac power source to a 3U APRS rectifier unit. For ordering information, see the “Power cables” on page 13-149 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.)

no 1 or 2 (depending on the number of units installed in the chassis)

AC power cable with an IEC 60320–C13 (female) connector (used to connect the ac power source to a 1U APRS rectifier module. For ordering information, see the “Power cables” on page 13-149 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.)

no 1 or 2 (depending on the number of units installed in the chassis)

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

yes, part of the ETS installation kit

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-3 Table 5-1 (Continued) Tools and materials required to make power connections to a shelf Item

Quantity

Supplied

√

yes Single-hole ring lugs for 10 AWG wire (3 U APRS dc power output 2 or 4 cables) (depending on the number of rectifier units installed in the chassis) Single-hole ring lugs for 1U APRS dc power output cables

2 or 4 yes (depending on the number of rectifier units installed in the chassis)

3U APRS installation kit. For more information, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.

no 1 or 2 (depending on the number of rectifier units installed in the chassis)

ANSI 14 AWG 5100 shelf to Fuse Panel or Breaker Interface Panel power cable, 3 m (10 ft) (NT0H49AA) (See Note 3.)

As required

no

ETSI 14 AWG 5100 shelf to Fuse Panel or Breaker Interface Panel As required power cable, 3 m (10 ft) (NT0H49AB) (See Note 3).

no

1U APRS installation kit (NTPM43AA). For more information, see 1 or 2 no “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network (depending on Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. the number of rectifier units installed in the chassis) Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the 10 AWG power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures. Note 3: Use this cable to connect a 3U APRS to a 5100 shelf. You must use the 3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH) to connect the 3U APRS to a Breaker Interface Panel or a Fuse Panel and use the NT0H49AA or the NT0H49AB to connect the Breaker Interface Panel or the Fuse Panel to the 5100 shelf. You cannot use the NT0H44AH 3U APRS installation kit to connect the 3U APRS to a 5100 shelf directly.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-4 Connecting power

Precautions CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure you know how to handle electronic components correctly before you begin installation procedures. Incorrect handling can cause damage to static-sensitive components.

CAUTION Risk of shelf malfunction

Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any 565/5100/5200 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to 565/5100/5200 equipment can cause shelf malfunction.

Procedure list Table 5-2 lists the procedures in this chapter. Table 5-2 Power connection procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

5-1 Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA)

5-6

Required to supply power to the DC shelf.

5-2 Connecting power on a 5100 AC power shelf (NTPM50BA)

5-19

Required to supply power to the AC shelf.

5-3 Connecting alternating current power to 5-26 a 3U APRS rectifier

Required if your site is using a 3U APRS rectifier to supply direct current power to the shelf.

5-4 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier

5-30

Required if your site is using a 3U APRS rectifier to supply direct current power to the shelf.

5-5 Connecting alternating current power to 5-37 a 1U APRS rectifier

Required if your site is using a 1U APRS rectifier to supply direct current power to the shelf.

5-6 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 1U APRS module

Required if your site is using a 1U APRS rectifier to supply direct current power to the shelf.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

5-40

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-5 Table 5-2 (Continued) Power connection procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

5-7 Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk Switch

5-45

Required for unamplified point-to-point networks using an Optical Trunk (OTS). If the site is using a rectifier to supply direct current power to shelves, you must use a 3U APRS (not a 1U APRS) rectifier with the OTS.

5-8 Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf

5-49

Required for unamplified or amplified point-to-point networks using an Enhanced Trunk Switch (ETS). If the site is using a rectifier to supply direct current power to shelves and if the 5100 shelf is fully populated, you must use a second 1U APRS for the ETS or a 3U APRS rectifier for the 5100 shelf and the ETS.

5-9 Connecting power to a Breaker Interface 5-57 Panel (NTN458RA)

Required if your site is using a BIP to supply power to the equipment.

5-10 Connecting power to an Ethernet hub

5-63

Required if your site is using an Ethernet Hub.

5-11 Connecting power to the Equipment Inventory Unit

5-68

Required if your site is using an Ethernet Hub.

5-12 Testing 5100 shelf power connections

5-72

Recommended. Applies to 5100 shelf NTPM50AA (which includes two DC power cards) and 5100 shelf NTPM5AB (which includes two AC power cards).

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-6 Connecting power

Procedure 5-1 Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Follow this procedure to connect power leads to a 5100 shelf, which is equipped with two DC power cards. Bear in mind that two types of 5100 shelves are available: •

5100 shelf (NTPM50AA), which includes two DC power cards

•

5100 shelf (NTPM50BA), which includes two AC power cards Note 1: Each 5100 must operate with either AC PSUs or DC PSUs but not a combination of both. Note 2: See Procedure 5-2 for instructions on connecting power leads to a 5100 NTPM50BA shelf.

For more information on 5100 hardware, see Hardware Description, 323-1701-102. Each 5100 shelf has two power cards (A and B) that are located in two power module slots to the left of the maintenance panel faceplate. Ciena recommends that you use both power cards, and connect two power sources to each shelf, and use one as the primary source and the other as the backup. With a redundant power supply, you can still supply power to the shelf should the primary source fail.

ATTENTION When facing the equipment rack, route the power cables along the left-hand side of the vertical rack rail. Secure the power cables to the rack rail using tie-wraps or lacing cord. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-7 Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA)

Requirements Table 5-3 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-3 Tools and materials to connect the power leads to a 5100 shelf Item

Quantity

Supplied

14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see Note 1, as required Note 2, and Note 3)

no

Wire crimping tool

1

no

Wire strippers

1

no

Torque wrench

1

no

Single-hole ring lugs for 14 AWG copper wire

2

no

Screwdriver

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

NOMEX paper

as required

no

Antioxidant paste

1

no

√

Note 1: If you are using the 3U APRS rectifier with 5100, you cannot use the 3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH) to connect the 3U APRS to a 5100 shelf directly. You must use 3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH) to connect the 3U APRS rectifier to a Breaker Interface Panel and use the 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (NT0H49AA (ANSI) or NT0H49AB (ETSI) to connect the Breaker Interface Panel to the 5100 shelf. Note 2: Two different insulation colors are used for the 14 AWG power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 3: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-8 Connecting power Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA)

Make sure that the power feeds meet the specifications in Table 5-4. Table 5-4 Power feed specifications Nominal operating range for power connections

Measure voltage

Across A (A –48 V and A RET)

–40 V to –60 V

Across B (B –48 V and B RET)

–40 V to –60 V

Note: For additional information regarding operating ranges for the 565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that you connect a ground wire to the 5100 shelf before you start this procedure. Failure to connect the ground wire can result in personal injury, damage to the equipment, or both.

DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power to the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel), and the power feeds on the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel) are off before you make connections. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that the Power A and Power B switches on the 5100 maintenance panel are in the OFF (O) position. Failure to turn the switches off can result in damage to electrical components on the shelf. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-9 Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA)

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them.

Action Step

Action

1

Make sure that both power feeds coming from the power sources are off.

2

Make sure that the Power A and Power B switches on the maintenance panel are in the OFF (O) position.

DANGER Risk of personal injury and equipment damage

Make sure that both power feeds coming from the power sources are off. Make sure that the Power A and Power B switches in the 5100 shelf maintenance panel are in the OFF (O) position. 3

Measure two lengths of insulated stranded copper wire to reach from the direct current (DC) terminal connectors on the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel) to the maintenance panel on the shelf to which the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel) will supply power. Note: For redundant power, measure enough wire to connect the output of the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel) to power card A of the 5100 shelf. Then measure enough wire to connect the output of the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel) to power card B of the corresponding 5100 shelf.

4

Cut the wires to the required length. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-10 Connecting power Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

5

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the end of the power cables.

ATTENTION Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making dc power connections. 6

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped wire and inside the compression lug barrel of the single-hole circular lug (see Figure 5-1).

Figure 5-1 Preparing a lug OM3593

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel. 7

Insert the wire into the single-hole circular lug.

8

Crimp one single-hole circular lug to the end of each wire.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that you protect cables. When you route power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them. 9

Loosen the captive screw and remove the power cover to access the power cards as shown in Figure 5-2 on page 5-11. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-11 Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

Figure 5-2 Releasing the cover OM1091t

10

Slip the metal tab on the left of the cover out of the slot as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Removing the cover OM1092t

PO AT

WE

R

WE

RA

O OFF

PO

US ON I

ST

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-12 Connecting power Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

11

If the power cables are twisted, untwist and straighten approximately 8–10 inches (20-25 centimeters) for each pair that you are connecting to Power card A and Power card B.

12

Loosen the Phillips head screw that secures power card A to the shelf. (The screws are located on the left of the power cards as shown in Figure 5-4.)

Figure 5-4 Releasing the power cards OM1381

13

Pull power card A out of the shelf just far enough to be able to work with the card (as shown in Figure 5-5 on page 5-14).

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Do not remove the power card from the shelf. The card can be damaged if it is completely removed. 14

Locate the power terminal block on the left side of the power card. See Figure 5-5 on page 5-14 for power terminal block location.

15

Remove the –48V and RET screws from the power card.

16

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lug and the input terminals (–48V and RET). —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-13 Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

17

Insert the –48V and RET screws through the ring lugs on the power feeds.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that you support the card from underneath, as you tighten the screws. 18

Connect the 0 V return cable to the screw terminal located closest to the front of the card. Note 1: The circuit pack top or underside is marked for –48V and RET. Note 2: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the 0V return is Blue. Note 3: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure that you to follow all local standards when performing these procedures.

19

Connect the –48 V cable to the screw terminal located closest to the back of the card. (The correct connections are marked on the top or bottom circuit pack.) Tighten the screws to a torque value of 10 in-lb. Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that you support the card from underneath, as you tighten the screws. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-14 Connecting power Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

Figure 5-5 Working with Power card A OM1094t

Power terminal block

Note: The 0 V return cable is on the inner part of the c-curve. The –48 V cable is on the outer part of the c-curve. 20

Route the cable according to Figure 5-5.

21

Press down on the cables as you slide the card back into the shelf. Make sure the cables route to the right of the metal guide at the top of the power card cage and out the left side of the card (as shown in Figure 5-6 on page 5-15 and Figure 5-8 on page 5-17).

CAUTION Risk of cable damage

Do not pinch the cables as you slide the card into the backplane. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-15 Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

Figure 5-6 Position of the metal guide (on the power card cage) OM1093f

22

Tighten the Phillips head screw to secure power card A in place, to a torque value of 8 in-lb.

23

Loosen the Phillips head screw that secures power card B to the shelf. The screw is located on the left of the power card.

24

Pull power card B out of the shelf just far enough so that you can work with the card (as shown in Figure 5-7 on page 5-17).

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Do not pull the power card out of the shelf. The card can be damaged, if completely removed. 25

Locate the power terminal block on the left side of the power card.

26

Remove the –48V and RET screws from the power card.

27

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lug and the input terminals (–48V and RET).

28

Insert –48V and RET screws through the ring lugs on the power feeds.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that you support the card from underneath, as you tighten the screws. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-16 Connecting power Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

29

Connect the 0 V return cable to the screw terminal closest to the front of the card. Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures.

30

Connect the –48 V cable to the screw terminal closer to the back of the card. (The correct connections are marked on the top of bottom of the circuit board.) Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures.

31

Route the cable according to Figure 5-7 on page 5-17.

32

Tighten the screws to a torque value of 10 in-lb.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that you support the card from underneath, as you tighten the screws. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-17 Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Figure 5-7 Working on Power card B OM1096t

Note: The 0 V return cable is on the outer part of the c-curve. The –48 V cable is on the inner part of the c-curve. 33

Route the connected power cables out the right side of the card, and slide power card B back into place.

CAUTION Risk of cable damage

Do not pinch the cables as you slide the card into the backplane. 34

Route the power cables from power card B over top of the brass plate on the card and over top of the brass plate on power card A, and out of the shelf (as shown in Figure 5-8).

Figure 5-8 Routing power cables for Power card B

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OM1097t

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-18 Connecting power Procedure 5-1 (continued) Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) Step

Action

35

Tighten the Phillips head screw to secure power card B in place, to a torque value of 8 in-lb.

36

Replace the power cover on the power block. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-19

Procedure 5-2 Connecting power on a 5100 AC power shelf (NTPM50BA) Use this procedure to connect power on a 5100 AC power shelf, which includes two AC power supply units (PSU). Bear in mind that two types of 5100 shelves are available: •

5100 shelf (NTPM50AA), which includes two DC power cards

•

5100 shelf (NTPM50BA), which includes two AC power cards Note: Each 5100 must operate with either AC PSUs or DC PSUs but not a combination of both.

For more information on 5100 hardware, see Hardware Description, 323-1701-102. Each 5100 shelf has two power cards (A and B) that are located in two power module slots to the left of the maintenance panel faceplate. Ciena recommends that you use both power cards, and connect two power sources to each shelf, and use one as the primary source and the other as the backup. With a redundant power supply, you can still supply power to the shelf if the primary source fails.

ATTENTION When facing the equipment rack, route the power cables along the left-hand side of the vertical rack rail. Secure the power cables to the rack rail using tie-wraps or lacing cord. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-20 Connecting power Procedure 5-2 (continued) Connecting power on a 5100 AC power shelf (NTPM50BA)

Requirements Table 5-5 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-5 Tools and materials Item

Quantity

Power cords

Supplied

2

separately orderable

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

Note: Three types of power cords are available. For details, see Table 13-9 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. If your application requires a different AC plug, contact Ciena for assistance.

√

ATTENTION When facing the equipment rack, route the power cables along the sides of the equipment rack. Secure the power cables to the vertical rack rail using tie-wraps or lacing cord. Make sure that the power feeds meet the specifications in Table 5-6. Table 5-6 Power feed specifications Nominal operating range for power connections

Measure voltage

Across A (A –48 V and A RET)

–40 V to –60 V

Across B (B –48 V and B RET)

–40 V to –60 V

Note: For additional information regarding operating ranges for the 565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-21 Procedure 5-2 (continued) Connecting power on a 5100 AC power shelf (NTPM50BA)

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that you connect a ground wire to the 5100 shelf before you start this procedure. Failure to connect the ground wire can result in personal injury, damage to the equipment, or both.

DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power to the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel), and the power feeds on the rectifier (or the Breaker Interface Panel) are off before you make connections. Do not handle live wires. Direct contact with live wires can cause personal injury.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that the Power A and Power B switches on the 5100 maintenance panel are in the OFF (O) position. Failure to turn the switches off can result in damage to electrical components on the shelf.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-22 Connecting power Procedure 5-2 (continued) Connecting power on a 5100 AC power shelf (NTPM50BA)

Action Step

Action

1

Remove the cover over the power supply units (PSU).

2

Make sure that the switch on both PSUs is in the off (down) position (see Figure 5-9 on page 5-23). Note: To change position, push the switch in and push down in the off position.

3

If the PSUs are not yet seated into the backplane of the 5100 shelf, seat them now (see Figure 5-9 on page 5-23).

4

Secure the PSUs into place with the captive fasteners (see Figure 5-10 on page 5-24).

5

Plug a power cord into the faceplate of each PSU (see Figure 5-10 on page 5-24).

6

Route the power cables to the left and off the 5100 shelf.

7

Plug the other end of the power cables into the power supply.

8

Secure the power cords on the rack using cable ties or lacing cord.

9

Replace the cover (removed in step 1) over the PSU faceplates (see Figure 5-11 on page 5-25). —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-23 Figure 5-9 Installing an AC power supply unit into a 5100 shelf OM3813

AC power supply units

Make sure that switch is in off (down) position. Push switch in and down.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-24 Connecting power Figure 5-10 AC PSUs in a 5100 shelf OM3661

Captive fasteners

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Plug power cord into each AC PSU

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-25 Figure 5-11 Installing the cover over the AC PSUs in a 5100 shelf OM3812

Cover

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-26 Connecting power

Procedure 5-3 Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS rectifier Follow this procedure to connect the alternating current power source to a 3U APRS rectifier. Note: Follow Procedure 5-4 “Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier”, in this book, to connect external power alarms to the rectifier. For more information on rectifiers, see “Rectifiers” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Table 5-7 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-7 Tools and materials for connecting alternating current power to a rectifier Item

Quantity

Supplied

√

AC power cable with an IEC 60320-C19 (male) connector

1 or 2 (depending on the no number of units installed in (Used to connect the ac power source to a 3U APRS the chassis) rectifier unit. For ordering information, see the “Power cables” on page 13-149 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.) Screwdriver

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH). For more information, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.

1 or 2 (depending on the number of rectifier units installed in the chassis)

no

ATTENTION When facing the equipment rack, route the power cables along the sides of the equipment rack. Secure the power cables to the vertical rack rail using tie-wraps or lacing cord. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-27 Procedure 5-3 (continued) Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS rectifier

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on a rectifier. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

DANGER Risk of electrical shock

The ac rectifiers require that the receptacles of the ac mains provide a ground/protective earth connection. The ground/protective earth conductor of the ac power cords must be connected to this ground/protective earth connection by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local and national electrical codes.

DANGER Risk of electrical shock

The NT0H43DB and NT0H43DC ac power cords are provided with open wires at one end, and therefore require a plug to be installed for connection of the power cords to the ac mains. The selection of the plug, and the installation of the plug, must be performed by a qualified (certified or licensed) person in accordance with local and national electrical codes. A hazardous installation can result if the plugs are not wired correctly. Refer to Table 5-8 for the pinouts when connecting a plug to the wires. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-28 Connecting power Procedure 5-3 (continued) Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS rectifier Table 5-8 Pinouts for NT0H43DB and NT0H43DC Color

Designation

Description

Solid black

L1

Line

Solid white

L2

Neutral

NT0H43DB (North America)

Solid green or green/yellow

Ground/protective earth

NT0H43DC (International) Solid brown

L1

Line

Solid blue

L2

Neutral

Green/yellow

Ground/protective Earth

CAUTION Protect cables

When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them. .

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Locate the ac power cords that provide power to the rectifier in such a way that the power cords are not subject to wear, abrasion, sharp edges, foot traffic, extreme temperatures, moisture, or other adverse wear conditions that may be detrimental to their long-term integrity. The cords are not intended for permanent connection to the ac power source by way of a junction box, but rather must connect to the ac mains by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local and national electrical codes.

ATTENTION For redundant power supply, Ciena recommends that both ac circuits be derived from the same ac phase. Consult your local and national safety codes if you are considering powering each rectifier from different ac phases. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-29 Procedure 5-3 (continued) Connecting alternating current power to a 3U APRS rectifier

Action Step

Action

1

Plug the power cord (IEC 320-C19, female) into the connector marked PS1 on the back of the rectifier chassis. See Figure 5-12.

2

If you have installed a second rectifier, plug another power cord into the connector marked PS2.

3

Plug the other end of the power cord from step 1 (and, if applicable, step 2) into an approved alternating current power source.

4

Route the power cord along the left side of the frame and support it using tie wraps or lacing cord.

Figure 5-12 Rectifier chassis—back view (with rectifier modules) OM0100p

Terminal connector access covers

PS2

PS2

DC power feeds

PS1

PS1

PS2

PS1

Attach ground wire here

AC power feeds —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-30 Connecting power

Procedure 5-4 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier Follow this procedure to connect wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier. For all other rectifiers follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: You cannot connect the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier to a 5100 shelf directly. You must connect the direct current outputs of the 3U APRS rectifier to a Breaker Interface Panel (or fuse panel) using the 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wires and connect the direct current outputs of the Breaker Interface Panel (or Fuse Panel) to the 5100 shelf using the 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wires. For more information on rectifiers, see “Rectifiers” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Complete Procedure 5-1, “Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA)” before performing this procedure. Table 5-9 lists the tools and materials required for connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a rectifier chassis. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-31 Procedure 5-4 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier Table 5-9 Tools and materials for connecting wires to the direct current outputs Item

Quantity

Supplied

Wire crimper

1

no

Wire strippers

1

no

10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see Note 1 and Note 2)

As required

no

Phillips No. 2 screwdriver

1

no

Torque wrench

1

no

3U APRS installation kit (see Note 3). For more information, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.

no 1 or 2 (depending on the number of rectifier units installed in the chassis)

Antioxidant paste

1

√

no

Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures. Note 3: You cannot use the 3U APRS installation kit to connect the 3U APRS to a 5100 shelf directly. You must use 3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH) to connect the 3U APRS rectifier to a Breaker Interface Panel and use the 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (NT0H49AA (ANSI) or NT0H49AB (ETSI) to connect the Breaker Interface Panel to the 5100 shelf. Refer to Procedure 5-9 “Connecting power to a Breaker Interface Panel (NTN458RA)” on page 5-57. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-32 Connecting power Procedure 5-4 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier

ATTENTION If you use a 110/120 V ac feed, each shelf requires one rectifier chassis and two rectifier modules. If you use a 208/220/240 V ac feed, one module can provide power for up to two 5100 shelves.

ATTENTION When facing the equipment rack, route the power cables along the left-hand side of the vertical rack rail to the Breaker Interface Panel (or fuse panel). Secure the power cables to the rack rail using tie-wraps or lacing cord.

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on a rectifier. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

CAUTION Protect cables

When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them.

Figure 5-13 3U APRS rectifier chassis - front view with power switches off OM1301p

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-33 Procedure 5-4 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier Figure 5-14 3U APRS rectifier—back view with dc power cables connected OM1302p

Action Step

Action

1

Make sure that the power switches on the rectifier chassis are in the Off position. See Figure 5-13 on page 5-32.

2

Remove the access cover to the terminal connector for PS1 at the back of the rectifier chassis. (For redundant power, also remove the access cover to the terminal connector for PS2.)

3

Locate the direct current terminal connectors. See Figure 5-16 on page 5-36. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-34 Connecting power Procedure 5-4 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier Step

Action

4

Measure two lengths of 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire to reach from the direct current terminal connectors on the PS1 and PS2 rectifiers to the Breaker Interface Panel (or Fuse Panel) to which the rectifier will supply power. Figure 5-14 on page 5-33 shows a back view of the rectifier chassis.

5

Cut the wires to the required length.

6

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the end of the 10 AWG power cables.

ATTENTION Two different insulation colors are used for the 10 AWG power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making dc power connections. 7

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel of the single-hole circular lug. See Figure 5-15 on page 5-35.

8

Insert the wire into the single-hole circular lug.

9

Crimp one single-hole circular lug to the end of each wire.

10

For each wire pair, remove the screws for the –48V and 0V (RET) from the direct current terminal connectors. See Figure 5-16 on page 5-36.

11

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lug and the input terminals (–48V and 0V (RET).

12

For each wire pair, connect the –48V 10 AWG power cable to –48V terminal to a torque value of 10 in-lb. See Figure 5-16 on page 5-36. Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures.

13

For each wire pair, connect the 0V 10 AWG power cable to the 0V (RET) terminal to a torque value of 10 in-lb. See Figure 5-16 on page 5-36. Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the – 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-35 Procedure 5-4 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier Step

Action

14

Re-install the access cover for PS1 and run the cable under the bottom of the access cover as shown in Figure 5-14 on page 5-33. (For redundant power, also re-install the access cover for PS2 and run the cable under the bottom of the access cover.)

CAUTION Protect cables

When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them. 15

Route the direct current cables along the bottom of the rectifier chassis to the equipment rack and secure the cables using lacing cord or tie wraps.

16

Follow Procedure 5-9 on page 5-57 to connect the power cables to the Breaker Interface Panel. Follow Procedure 5-3 on page 5-26 to connect alternating current power to the rectifier.

17

Repeat step 1 to step 16 if a second 5100 shelf must be connected to the same DC power source. —end—

Figure 5-15 Preparing a lug OM3593

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-36 Connecting power Figure 5-16 3U APRS terminal block OM0101p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-37

Procedure 5-5 Connecting alternating current power to a 1U APRS rectifier Follow this procedure to connect the alternating current (ac) power source to a 1U APRS rectifier module. For more information on rectifiers, see “Rectifiers” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Table 5-10 lists the tools and materials required to complete this procedure. Table 5-10 Tools and materials required to complete this procedure Item

Quantity

Supplied

Phillips screwdriver #1

1

no

√

1 or 2 (depending no on the number of (Used to connect the ac power source to a 1U APRS units installed in the rectifier module. For ordering information, see the chassis) “Power cables” on page 13-149 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.) AC power cable with an IEC 60320–C13 (female) connector

Cable ties

As required

no

Wax lacing cord

As required

no

ATTENTION Use cable ties or lacing cord to secure the power cables to the rack rail. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-38 Connecting power Procedure 5-5 (continued) Connecting alternating current power to a 1U APRS rectifier

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on a rectifier. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

CAUTION Risk of electrical shock

The ac rectifiers require that the receptacles of the ac mains provide a ground/protective earth connection. The ground/protective earth conductor of the ac power cords must be connected to this ground/protective earth connection by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local and national electrical codes.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

When routing power cables over metallic edges, wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the cables to protect them.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Locate the ac power cords that provide power to the rectifier in such a way that the power cords are not subject to wear, abrasion, sharp edges, foot traffic, extreme temperatures, moisture, or other adverse wear conditions that may be detrimental to their long-term integrity. The cords are not intended for permanent connection to the ac power source by way of a junction box, but rather must connect to the ac mains by way of a suitable plug in accordance with local and national electrical codes. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-39 Procedure 5-5 (continued) Connecting alternating current power to a 1U APRS rectifier

ATTENTION For redundant power supply, Ciena recommends that both ac circuits be derived from the same ac phase. Consult your local and national safety codes if you are considering powering each rectifier from different ac phases.

Action Step

Action

1

Make sure that the power switch on each rectifier module is in the Off (O) position.

2

Begin with the rectifier module in the left side of the chassis.

3

Loosen the screw on the strain relief connector and plug one power cord into the IEC 60320-C14 male connector, located on the left side of the module.

4

Tighten the screw on the strain relief connector to secure the cable.

5

Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the module in the right side of the chassis.

6

Route the power cords to the left side of the rack and secure them with cable ties.

7

Make sure that the power source has the correct electrical specifications. Plug the other end of the each power cord into an approved alternating current power source.

Power input (per rectifier unit)

Measured voltage

Voltage range

90 to 264 V ac

Note: For additional information regarding operating ranges for the 565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. Power output (per rectifier unit)

Measured voltage

Voltage range

–48 V dc ± 2 V

Note: For additional information regarding operating ranges for the 565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-40 Connecting power

Procedure 5-6 Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 1U APRS module Follow this procedure to connect the direct current (dc) terminals on a 1U APRS module to the 5100 power card. Ciena recommends that you provide a redundant power supply for all 565/5100/5200 shelves. For more information on rectifiers, see “Rectifiers” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements The 1U APRS chassis must be mounted in the rack, using the first set of empty mounting holes directly above the shelf to which it is supplying power, and the rectifier modules must be installed in the chassis. Follow Procedure 4-7 “Installing a 1U APRS rectifier chassis” in this book. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-41 Procedure 5-6 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 1U APRS module

Table 5-11 lists the tools and materials you require to complete this procedure. Table 5-11 Tools and materials required to complete this procedure Item

Quantity

Supplied

14 AWG dc power output cables (See Note 1 and Note 2)

2

yes

Single-hole ring lugs

4

yes

Adhesive backed cable tie mounts

2

no

Wire stripper (required for 14 AWG cable)

1

no

Wire cutter

1

no

Wire crimper (required for 14 AWG cable)

1

no

3/32 in. slot screwdriver

1

no

Cable ties

As required

no

NOMEX paper

As required

no

Antioxidant paste

1

no

√

Note 1: The 1U APRS kit supplies power cables with both red and black, and blue and black insulation. Follow the standard practice for your facility when choosing the wire colors and assigning polarities when making dc power connections. For details on the rectifier kit, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures. Note 3: Refer to Chapter 13 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, Part 3, 323-1701-110, for ordering information. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-42 Connecting power Procedure 5-6 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 1U APRS module

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power to the rectifier is off before you make connections on the terminal block. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

CAUTION Protect cables

Wrap and secure NOMEX paper around the power cables to protect them, wherever they come into contact with metal edges.

Action Step

Action

1

If the terminal cover is present, remove the screw that secures the cover to the module, then remove the cover. The screw is located between the alarms connector and the indicators lamps, on the right side of the module (see Figure 5-17 on page 5-44).

2

Take the shorter DC power output cable from the rectifier kit to connect the power cables to the rectifier module in the left side of the chassis.

3

Strip approximately 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation off the end of each wire.

4

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel of the single-hole circular lug (see Figure 5-18 on page 5-44).

5

Insert the wire into the single-hole circular compression lug.

6

Crimp a single-hole circular lug to the end of each wire.

7

Remove the screws from the RTN and –48V pins on the terminal block.

8

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lug and the input terminals (RTN and –48V).

9

Using the RTN wire on the DC power output cable, install the lug onto the RTN terminal block pin.

10

Using the –48V wire on the DC power output cable, install the lug onto the –48V terminal block pin. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-43 Procedure 5-6 (continued) Connecting wires to the direct current outputs of a 1U APRS module Step

Action

11

Replace and tighten the screws.

12

Take the second (longer) DC output power cable from the rectifier kit and repeat steps 3 to 11, to make the power connections on the module in the right side of the chassis.

13

Install the adhesive-backed cable tie mounts on the side of the rectifier.

14

Route the cables to the left side of the rack and secure them to the cable tie mount on the side of the rectifier.

15

Follow Procedure 6-3 “Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier”, in this book, to connect the telemetry cables.

16

Install the terminal block (transparent plastic) cover (as shown in Figure 5-17 on page 5-44). a. Insert the flange on the left side of the cover into the grill slot located directly to the left of the terminal block. b. Align the hole in the right side of the cover with the screw hole in the module. c. Insert the screw into the hole and tighten the screw. d. Repeat step a. to step c. for the second terminal block.

17

To connect the power cables to the shelf, follow Procedure 5-1 “Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA)” in this book. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-44 Connecting power Figure 5-17 Installing the terminal block cover OM1710p

Figure 5-18 Preparing a ring lug OM3593

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-45

Procedure 5-7 Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk Switch Follow this procedure to make power connections to the Optical Trunk Switch (OTS). If the sites uses a rectifier, you must use a 3U APRS rectifier with the OTS. To make electrical connections from the OTS to the power supply, follow the connector pinout diagram on the back of the module. For more information on the OTS, see “Optical Trunk Switch” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Table 5-12 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-12 Tools and materials for connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk Switch Item

Quantity

Supplied

14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see Note 1 and Note 2)

as required

no

Wire crimping tool

1

no

Single-hole ring lugs for 14 AWG copper wire

4

no

Screwdriver

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

Antioxidant paste

1

no

√

Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the 14 AWG power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-46 Connecting power Procedure 5-7 (continued) Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk Switch

Figure 5-19 shows the front panel of the Optical Trunk Switch. Figure 5-19 Front panel OM0304 FAIL

ACT

FAIL

ACT

*AUTO - GRN

PWR A/B FAIL

UNIT ON / FAIL

MAN - RED

OTSIN

OTSOUT

STNBY Tx

PRI Tx

STNBY Rx

PRI Rx

ON - GRN FAIL - RED PRI *SWBK STNBY

OPTICAL TRUNK SWITCH

Figure 5-20 shows the back panel of the Optical Trunk Switch. Figure 5-20 Back panel OM0305p

ALARMS

-48V A

MAJOR SWITCH A

PRIMARY FAIL

FGND

ETHERNET

STNBY/POWER A or B FAIL SENSE INPUT

B

FUSES

POWER

+RET A FGND -48V B +RET B

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on an Optical Trunk Switch. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

Action Step

Action

1

Ensure that all power is off before making any power connections to the Optical Trunk Switch. Note: The power source providing DC power to the OTS (which must be turned off) can be either the 3U APRS rectifier or a secondary distribution panel (SDP). Power control should be controlled using a Breaker Interface Panel (BIP). By turning the breaker connected to the OTS off, power distribution is controlled.

2

Locate the power terminal block on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-47 Procedure 5-7 (continued) Connecting power leads to the Optical Trunk Switch Step

Action

3

Measure and cut one pair of 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire to reach from the OTS terminal block connectors (–48V A and +RET A). Note: The primary power source is either the direct current power source or a rectifier.

4

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the cable.

5

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel of a 14 AWG single-hole ring lug (see Figure 5-22 on page 5-48).

6

Insert the wire into the single-hole ring lug.

7

Crimp the wire to the single-hole ring lug.

8

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lug and the input terminals (–48V and RET).

9

Make sure both power feeds have the correct electrical specifications.

Nominal operating ranges for power connections Measured voltage Across A (A –48V and A RET)

–40V to –60V

Across B (B –48V and B RET)

–40V to –60V

Note: For additional information regarding operating ranges for the 565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. 10

Connect one end of the A power cables to the primary power source and the other end to the A power source on the OTS.

11

Repeat step 3 to step 10 for the B power source on the OTS.

12

Route and secure the OTS power cables along the side of the equipment rack using lacing cord or tie wraps.

13

Route and secure the OTR power cables along the back right-side of the frame and support it using tie wraps or lacing cord. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-48 Connecting power Figure 5-21 Power connections for the Optical Trunk Switch OM1305p

Figure 5-22 Preparing a ring lug OM3593

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-49

Procedure 5-8 Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf Follow this procedure to make power connections and ground the Enhanced Trunk Switch (ETS) shelf. If the site uses a rectifier, you must use a 3U APRS or a 1U APRS rectifier with the ETS. Rectifiers are used to convert alternating current (ac) power to (direct current) dc to provide –48Vdc power to the 5100 system, when a –48Vdc power source is not available. Note 1: There is not enough power to power up the ETS shelf when the 5100 shelf is fully populated and a 1U APRS rectifier is used. If the site is using a rectifier to supply direct current power to shelves and if the 5100 shelf is fully populated, you must use a second 1U APRS for the ETS or a 3U APRS rectifier for both the 5100 shelf and the ETS. Note 2: The 1U APRS rectifier chassis must be mounted either in the first set of empty mounting holes directly above the ETS to which it is supplying power or directly below the ETS if the 1U APRS rectifier chassis is also supplying power to the 5100 shelf. To ground the ETS shelf, use the dual ground connector located at the rear of the ETS shelf. Figure 5-23 on page 5-51 shows the ETS shelf dual ground connector. To make electrical connections from the ETS shelf to the dc power supply, follow the connector pinout diagram on the 4-pin terminal block located on the rear of the unit. Figure 5-24 on page 5-51 shows the terminal block. Table 5-14 on page 5-51 lists the power connector pinout. For more information on the “Enhanced Trunk Switch”, refer to the Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements The power supply source for the ETS shelf must meet the ETS shelf power specifications listed in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. Note 1: The ETS is specified for –48V DC typical, minimum of –40V DC, maximum of –57V DC operation. Note 2: The ETS maximum power supply is not –75V DC, as it is for the 565/5100/5200 system. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-50 Connecting power Procedure 5-8 (continued) Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf

The 5100 rack must be grounded to the earth ground system of the building. For details on how to ground the rack, refer to Procedure 3-3, “Connecting the rack frame ground to the office ground”. The ETS shelf must be grounded to the 5100 ground point. The steps to ground the ETS shelf are part of this procedure. Table 5-13 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-13 Tools and materials list Item

Quantity

Supplied

√

18 AWG (0.8 mm2, minimum), 16 AWG, 14 AWG or 12 4 wires for the power no AWG (3.00 mm2, maximum) insulated stranded or connections of the ETS solid copper wire (minimum) (see Note) shelf 10 AWG (5 mm2) insulated stranded copper wire (see Note)

1 wire for the grounding connection

yes, part of the ETS installation kit

Wire crimping tool

1

no

Single-hole (#6 screw) ring lugs for 12, 14, 16 or 18 AWG copper wire, depending on the wire size used

8

no

Single ring lug for 10 AWG copper wire (for the ground 1 connection to 565/5100/5200 rack)

no

Dual-hole ring lug for 10 AWG copper wire (for the ground connection to ETS dual ground connector)

1

yes, already installed on the ETS shelf 2-hole ground connector

Screwdriver

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

Antioxidant paste

1

no

Note: Two colors are used to distinguish the lead power cable from the return power cable. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when you make power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-51 Procedure 5-8 (continued) Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf Figure 5-23 Dual grounding point at the rear of the ETS shelf OM2610p

Figure 5-24 Power terminal block at the rear of the ETS shelf OM2436t

A -48V RET

-48V RET

B

Table 5-14 lists the ETS power terminal block pinout. Table 5-14 ETS power terminal block pinout (left to right) Power supply

Pin

Function

A

–48V

Pin for making the electrical connection from the –48V DC source from supply A to the shelf

RET

Pin for making the return connection between the shelf and power supply A.

center Pin

Not used.

–48V

Pin for making the electrical connection from the –48V DC source from the supply B to the shelf.

RET

Pin for making the return connection between the shelf and power supply B.

B

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-52 Connecting power Procedure 5-8 (continued) Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf

Figure 5-25 shows a ring lug. Figure 5-25 Preparing a ring lug OM3593

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on an Enhanced Trunk Switch shelf. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-53 Procedure 5-8 (continued) Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf

Action Step

Action

1

Make sure that all power is off before making any power connections to the Enhanced Trunk Switch shelf. Note 1: The power source providing DC power to the ETS (which must be turned off) can be either the 3U APRS rectifier, the 1U APRS rectifier, or a secondary distribution panel (SDP). Power control must be controlled using a breaker interface panel (BIP). By turning the breaker connected to the ETS off, power distribution is controlled. Note 2: There is not enough power to power up the ETS shelf when the 5100 shelf is fully populated and a 1U APRS rectifier is used. If the site is using a rectifier to supply direct current power to shelves and if the 5100 shelf is fully populated, you must use a second 1U APRS for the ETS or a 3U APRS rectifier for the 5100 shelf and ETS.

Grounding the ETS shelf 2

Locate the dual ground connector point on the back of the Enhanced Trunk Switch (see Figure 5-23 on page 5-51). To locate the dual ground connector on the ETS shelf, look for this symbol.

3

On the ETS dual ground connector, the dual hole ring lug is already attached. Unscrew both screws and remove the dual hole ring lug to be able to attach a wire to it.

4

Measure and cut one 10 AWG insulated stranded or solid copper wire to reach from the ETS ground connector and the 5100 rack grounding point.

5

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the wire.

6

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire on both ends and inside the compression lug barrel of a 10 AWG single-hole ring lug and a 10 AWG dual-hole ring lug.

7

Insert the wire into the compression lug. Repeat on the other side.

8

Crimp one end of the wire to the 10 AWG single-hole ring lug (see Figure 5-25 on page 5-52).

9

Crimp the other end of the wire to a 10 AWG dual-hole ring lug.

10

Connect the dual-hole ring lug of the earth wire to the two ETS ground connector pins and tighten the screws. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-54 Connecting power Procedure 5-8 (continued) Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf Step

Action

11

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lug and the metallic grounding strip that connects to the system grounding point.

12

Attach the other end of the earth wire to the metallic grounding strip that connects to the 5100 rack system grounding point. To locate the 5100 rack system grounding point (see Figure 5-26 on page 5-56).

Making the power connections to the ETS shelf 13

Locate the power terminal block on the back of the ETS (see Figure 5-24 on page 5-51).

14

Loosen the screws that secure the plastic cover over the power terminal block. You do not have to completely remove the screws to remove the cover.

15

After you loosen the screws, slide the plastic cover off the power terminal block.

16

Measure and cut one pair of 18, 16, 14 or 12 AWG insulated stranded or solid copper wire to reach from the ETS power terminal block connectors (–48V and RET on the A side) to the primary power source. Note: The primary power source is either the direct current power source or a rectifier.

17

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the cable.

18

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel of a 18, 16, 14 or 12 AWG single-hole ring lug (see Figure 5-25 on page 5-52).

19

Insert the wire into the compression lug.

20

Crimp the wire to the compression lug.

21

Make sure that both power feeds have the correct electrical specifications.

Nominal operating ranges for power connections Measured voltage Across A side (–48V and RET)

–40V to –57V

Across B side (–48V and RET)

–40V to –57V

Note: For additional information regarding the operating ranges for the ETS, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-55 Procedure 5-8 (continued) Connecting power leads and grounding the ETS shelf Step

Action

22

Using a screwdriver, loosen the retaining screws below the pins marked –48V and RET on the A side of the power terminal block.

23

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the compression lug and the input terminals (–48V and RET).

24

On the A side, attach the end of one wire to the pin marked –48V and another to the pin marked RET.

25

Connect the ends of the power wires from the A side to the appropriate connectors on the power supply.

26

Repeat step 16 to step 25 for the B power source on the ETS.

27

Slide the plastic cover into place over the power terminal block.

28

Tighten the screws to secure the plastic cover to the unit.

29

Route and secure the ETS power and grounding cables along the side of the equipment rack using lacing cord or tie wraps.

30

You can now turn on the power to the ETS shelf. Note: The power A and power B LEDs on the front of the ETS shelf is lit. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-56 Connecting power Figure 5-26 Grounding point on the 5100 rack (side-front view of the rack) OM3663.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-57

Procedure 5-9 Connecting power to a Breaker Interface Panel (NTN458RA) Use this procedure to connect power to the Breaker Interface Panel (BIP), NTN458RA. For more information on 5100 hardware, see Hardware Description, 323-1701-102. Note: You cannot connect the direct current outputs of a 3U APRS rectifier to a 5100 shelf directly. You must connect the direct current outputs of the 3U APRS rectifier to a Breaker Interface Panel (or fuse panel) using the 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wires and connect the direct current outputs of the Breaker Interface Panel (or fuse panel) to the 5100 shelf using the 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wires. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-58 Connecting power Procedure 5-9 (continued) Connecting power to a Breaker Interface Panel (NTN458RA)

Requirements Table 5-15 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-15 Tools and materials to connect power to a Breaker Interface Panel (BIP) Item

Quantity

Supplied

10 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see Note 1, Note 2, and Note 3)

as required (see Note 4)

no

Wire crimping tool

1

no

Torque wrench

1

no

Single-hole ring lugs for 10 AWG copper wire

2

no

Screwdriver

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

Antioxidant paste

1

no

√

Note 1: If you are using the 3U APRS rectifier with 5100, you cannot use the 3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH) to connect the 3U APRS to a 5100 shelf directly. You must use 3U APRS installation kit (NT0H44AH) to connect the 3U APRS rectifier to a Breaker Interface Panel and use the 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (NT0H49AA (ANSI) or NT0H49AB (ETSI) to connect the Breaker Interface Panel to the 5100 shelf. Note 2: Two different insulation colors are used for the power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 3: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures. Note 4: If you have performed Procedure 5-4 on page 5-30 already, you do not require the 10 AWG insulated stranded copper wires. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-59 Procedure 5-9 (continued) Connecting power to a Breaker Interface Panel (NTN458RA)

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on a Breaker Interface Panel. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

Action .

Step

Action

Connecting power to the equipment frame (input wiring) Note: Make sure that you follow operating company guidelines when you attach input wiring. 1

Make sure that the input power is off and that all circuit breakers located on the front of the BIP are in the OFF (0 position) on both the A and B sides. No LEDs should be on.

2

Strip approximately 13 mm (0.5 in.) of insulation from the ends of the 10 AWG copper power wire.

3

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel of the two-hole compression lugs (see Figure 5-27 on page 5-60).

4

Insert the wire into the two-hole compression lugs on both ends of the 10 AWG copper power wire.

5

Crimp the straight or angled two-hole compression lugs onto 10 AWG copper wires.

6

Insulate lug barrels with UL94 V-0 rated heat shrink tubing.

7

Remove plastic covers from both pairs of BATT and RTN input terminals.

8

Clean all input terminals with a nonabrasive, nonmetallic pad.

9

If required, lightly coat antioxidant on lugs and input BATT and RTN terminals.

10

Connect lugs to input terminals on back of breaker interface panel as shown in the Figure 5-28 on page 5-61 and Figure 5-29 on page 5-62.

11

Use a torque wrench to verify that torque has been applied correctly: tighten lugs to 20 in-lb (2.27 Nm).

12

After connecting input lugs to both sides (Sides A and B), supply input power to Sides A and B. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-60 Connecting power Procedure 5-9 (continued) Connecting power to a Breaker Interface Panel (NTN458RA) Step

Action

13

Make sure that both PWR (power) LEDs (A and B) on front panel are light (green).

14

Use a voltmeter to test voltage and polarity at input terminals of breaker panel.

15

Re-attach plastic input terminal covers.

Testing input power 16

Turn off power to either Side A or B.

17

Verify that corresponding PWR (power) LED extinguishes.

18

Verify that ALARM LED turns red.

19

Repeat step 16 to step 18 on the other side not yet tested.

20

Shutoff all power to the breaker interface panel.

Connecting power to the shelf 21

Go to Procedure 5-1, Connecting the power leads to a 5100 shelf (NTPM50AA) on page 5-6 if you have not performed this procedure already. —end—

Figure 5-27 Preparing a two-hole lug OM3593

Lug barrel

0.5 in. (13 mm) Copper wire Crimp-type two-hole lug

Insulated copper wire

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

0.5 in. (13 mm)

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-61 Figure 5-28 Input lug connections OM2707p

BATT

RTN Heat shrink tubing

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-62 Connecting power Figure 5-29 Breaker interface panel (BIP) - NTN458RA OM3055p

Output connectors B

A

Rear view (rotated) TOP OF PANEL PWR ALM

FUSE ALARM VIS AUD

NO

NC

NC

NO

C

A

R

NC

NO

NC

NO

C

A

R

C

C

NC

NO

C

A

R

BAY ALARMS CONTACTS ACTIVATE CR MJ MN

5"

Top view 23" bracket 19" bracket A

B

Front view Output breakers power A 565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Output breakers power B Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-63

Procedure 5-10 Connecting power to an Ethernet hub Use this procedure to connect power to the Ethernet hub (NT0H43BB). For more information on the Ethernet hub, see “Ethernet hub” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Table 5-16 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-16 Tools and materials for connecting power to the Ethernet hub (NT0H43BB) Item

Quantity

Supplied

14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire (see Note 1 and Note 2)

as required

no

Wire crimping tool

1

no

Single-hole ring lugs for 14 AWG copper wire

4

no

Screwdriver

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

Antioxidant paste

1

no

√

Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the 14 AWG power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Local standards may specify a different color coding than those listed in this book. Make sure to follow all local standards when performing these procedures.

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on an Ethernet hub. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-64 Connecting power Procedure 5-10 (continued) Connecting power to an Ethernet hub

Action .

Step

Action

Preparing power cables 1

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in) of insulation from both ends of the 14 AWG power cables (see Figure 5-30 on page 5-66).

2

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel. Repeat on the other end.

3

Insert the wire into the single-hole ring lug. Repeat on the other end.

4

Crimp the wire to the single-hole ring lug.

5

Repeat step 1 to step 4 for both pairs of 14 AWG power cables (one pair to connect to the primary power source and the second pair to connect to the redundant power source).

Connecting power cables 6

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lugs of the power cables and the input terminals (–48V and 0 V DC [RTN]) on both sides (A and B).

7

Use one pair of 14 AWG power cables to connect the primary power source to the A+ (–48 V DC) and A– (0 V DC [RTN]) terminals of the terminal block (see Figure 5-31 on page 5-66). Note: The primary power source is either the direct current power source, or a rectifier.

DANGER Risk of personal injury

There is a risk of electrical shock when routing the power and making the power connections. 8

Use the second set of 14 AWG power cables to route power from the redundant power source to the B+ (–48 V DC) and B– (0 V DC [RTN]) terminals on the Ethernet hub.

9

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the 14 AWG ground cable wire (see Figure 5-30 on page 5-66).

10

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel of a single-hole ring lug. Repeat at the other end.

Grounding

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-65 Procedure 5-10 (continued) Connecting power to an Ethernet hub Step

Action

11

Insert the wire into the single-hole ring lug. Repeat on the other end.

12

Crimp the wire to the single-hole ring lug. See Figure 5-30 on page 5-66.

13

If required, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lugs of the ground cable and the metallic grounding strip that connects to the system ground point.

14

Make sure that both power feeds have the correct electrical specifications.

Nominal operating ranges for power connections Measured voltage Across A (A –48V and A RET)

36V to 70V DC

Across B (B –48V and B RET)

36V to 70V DC

Note: For additional information regarding operating ranges for the 565/5100/5200, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. 15

Connect one end of the 14 AWG ground wire to the primary ground on the Ethernet hub. Note: The primary ground is on the POWER A side. See Figure 5-32 on page 5-67.

16

Connect the other end of the ground wire to the metallic grounding strip that connects to the system grounding point.

17

Use cable ties to tie the power cables and ground wire to the equipment rack as required.

Securing cables

Switching on power 18

Switch the circuit breakers for the primary and redundant –48 V DC power supplies to the ON position. Note: For acceptable voltage range, see Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.

19

Check that the green power indicator LED (labeled PWR) turns ON. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-66 Connecting power Figure 5-30 Preparing a single-hole ring lug OM1324p

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel. Figure 5-31 Ethernet hub OM3640 POWER A

POWER B

10BASE–T

POWER A PWR 1

CLEI

48VDC

+

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

LINK RX

POWER B

-GND+ 48VDC

Ground for power B Power feed B

Ethernet ports 1 to 12

Ground for power A Power feed A

Note 1: Ethernet cables are routed out through to the right side of the rack at the front. Note 2: Ground wires are routed and connected to the metallic grounding strips on the left side of the rack at the front.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-67 Figure 5-32 Ethernet hub mounted in the rack OM3641.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-68 Connecting power

Procedure 5-11 Connecting power to the Equipment Inventory Unit Use this procedure to connect power to the Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) (NT0H43HA). For more information on the Equipment Inventory Unit, see “Equipment Inventory Unit” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Table 5-17 lists the tools and materials required for this procedure. Table 5-17 Tools and materials for connecting power leads to an EIU Item

Quantity

Supplied

14-16, #8 stud ring terminal (for power)

4

yes

14 AWG black wire (power)

2 x 9 ft

yes

14 AWG red wire (power)

2 x 9 ft

yes

14 AWG blue wire (power)

2x 9 ft

yes

No. 2 Phillips screwdriver

1

no

5/16-inch socket (for hexhead screws)

1

no

Torque wrench

1

no

Wire crimping tool

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

Lacing cord or wax string

as required

no

Antioxidant paste

1

no

√

Note 1: Two different insulation colors are used for the 14 AWG power cables. Follow the standard practice for your facility to assign wire color polarities when making power connections. In ANSI specifications, the –48V lead is Red, and the 0V return is Black. In ETSI specifications, the –48V lead is Grey, and the 0V return is Blue. Note 2: Screws on the EIU power terminal block must be tightened to a torque value of 10 in.-lb. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-69 Procedure 5-11 (continued) Connecting power to the Equipment Inventory Unit

Precautions DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that all power is off before you make connections on an Equipment Inventory Unit. Do not handle live wires. If you handle live wires you can cause personal injury, damage to equipment, or both.

Action .

Step

Action

1

Ensure that the input power is off and that all circuit breakers located on the front of the Equipment Inventory Unit are in the OFF (0 position) on both the A and B sides. No LEDs should be on.

2

Locate the power terminal block on the front of the Equipment Inventory Unit (see Figure 5-33 on page 5-70).

DANGER Risk of personal injury

There is a risk of electrical shock when routing the power and making the power connections. 3

Measure and cut one pair of 14 AWG insulated stranded copper wire to reach from the Equipment Inventory Unit terminal block connectors (–48 A and A RET) to the primary power source. Note: The primary power source is either the direct current power source or a rectifier.

4

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from both ends of the cable. Repeat on the other end.

5

Apply antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel of the 14 AWG single-hole ring lug (see Figure 5-34 on page 5-71). Repeat on the other end.

6

Insert the wire into the single-hole ring lug. Repeat on the other end.

7

Crimp the wire to the single-hole ring lug (see Figure 5-34 on page 5-71). —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-70 Connecting power Procedure 5-11 (continued) Connecting power to the Equipment Inventory Unit Step

Action

8

Make sure both power feeds have the correct electrical specifications.

Nominal operating ranges for power connections

Measured voltage

Across A (A –48V and A RET)

–40V to –70V (typical is –48V)

Across B (B –48V and B RET)

–40V to –70V (typical is –48V)

Note: For additional information regarding the operating ranges for the Equipment Inventory Unit, see the “Hardware specifications” chapter in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180. 9

If required, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the single-hole ring lug and input terminals (–48V and –0V [RET]).

10

Connect one end of the A power cables to the primary power source and the other end to the A power source on the Equipment Inventory Unit.

11

Repeat step 3 to step 10 for the B power source on the Equipment Inventory Unit.

12

Switch the circuit breakers located on the front of the Equipment Inventory Unit are in the ON (I position) on both the A and B sides.

13

Check that the green power indicator LEDs (labeled Power A and Power B) turn ON.

14

Route and secure the Equipment Inventory Unit power cables along the side of the equipment rack using lacing cord or tie wraps. —end—

Figure 5-33 Front panel of the EIU OM3642.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Connecting power 5-71 Figure 5-34 Preparing a single-hole ring lug OM1324p

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

5-72 Connecting power

Procedure 5-12 Testing 5100 shelf power connections Follow this procedure to test the power connections to the 5100 shelf. Bear in mind that two types of 5100 shelves are available: •

5100 shelf (NTPM50AA), which includes two DC power cards

•

5100 shelf (NTPM50BA), which includes two AC power cards

Requirements Replace the cover of the maintenance panel before you begin this procedure.

Action Step

Action

1

Make sure that both power breakers on the shelf are in the OFF (O) position.

2

Apply power to the power feeds.

The Power indicator lamps of the connected power cards turn red. 3

Set the Power A breaker to the ON ( | ) position.

The Power A indicator lamp turns green and the fans of the cooling unit come on. 4

Set the Power A breaker to the OFF (O) position.

The Power A indicator lamp turns red and the fans of the cooling unit go off. 5

Set Power B breaker to the ON ( | ) position.

The Power B indicator lamp turns green and the fans of the cooling unit come on. 6

Set the Power B breaker to the OFF (O) position.

The Power B indicator lamp turns red and the fans of the cooling unit go off. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-1

Installing peripheral cables

6-

Use the procedures in this chapter to make the connections required to support data communications links between network elements in your 5100 network.

Requirements Before you begin the procedures in this chapter, make sure that you have completed the necessary procedures in “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book. Three options are available to connect shelves: •

In sites with only two shelves, you can connect the shelves directly using a cross-over Ethernet cable (Procedure 6-4). In this scenario, the shelves can be equipped with a Shelf Processor (SP) or an Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP).

•

You can connect two or more shelves through an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology) using Ethernet cables (Procedure 6-5). In this scenario, shelves can be equipped with an SP or an eSP. — For shelves equipped with an SP, you must use cross-over Ethernet cables to connect the shelves to the hub and straight-through Ethernet cables to connect to the data communications network (DCN) device. (Follow the requirement listed in Table 6-13.) — For shelves equipped with an eSP, you can use either cross-over or straight-through Ethernet cables to connect to the hub or to the DCN device.

•

You can connect two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch on the eSP (chained topology) using cross over or straight-through Ethernet cables (Procedure 6-6). In this scenario, which eliminates the requirement for an Ethernet hub, shelves must be equipped with an eSP.

For details on the SP and the eSP, see “OSC circuit packs” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102. For details on data communications, see “Data communications in the 565/5100/5200 network” in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-2 Installing peripheral cables

Your system may require an additional LAN connection to enable you to monitor system management information from another site, depending on your network configuration.

Ethernet cable requirements Table 6-1 lists the quantity (based on the number of shelves at a site), and type of Ethernet cables you require to interconnect 5100 shelves. Table 6-1 Ethernet cable requirements Number of shelves at the Ethernet hub site required

2

No

Ethernet cables required Cross-over (shielded)

Straight-through

2.15 m (7 ft)

4.5 m (15 ft)

2.75 m (9 ft)

1

N/A

1

Types of Ethernet cables Table 6-2 lists the types and lengths of 10Base-T Ethernet cables available from Ciena. Table 6-2 Available types and lengths of Ethernet cables Type of wiring

Length

Use

Straight-through

2.75 m (9 ft) Used to connect a 5100 shelf to the System Manager computer.

Cross-over (shielded)

2.15 m (7 ft) Used to connect two 5100 shelves in the same rack.

Precautions CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure you know how to handle electronic components correctly before you begin installation procedures. Incorrect handling can cause damage to static-sensitive components.

CAUTION Risk of shelf malfunction

Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any 565/5100/5200 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to 565/5100/5200 equipment can cause shelf malfunction.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-3

Procedure list Table 6-3 lists the procedures in this chapter. Table 6-3 Data communications connections procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

6-1 Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system

6-5

Optional.

6-2 Connecting an external power alarm to a 6-11 3U APRS rectifier

Required to monitor the power status of the 3U APRS rectifier modules.

6-3 Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier

6-13

Required to monitor the status of the 1U APRS rectifier modules.

6-4 Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable

6-18

Required.

6-5 Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology)

6-21

Required if you deploy an Ethernet hub.

6-6 Connecting two or more shelves through 6-26 an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology)

√

Required starting in Release 10.0 if shelves include an Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP). Note: Release 10.0 introduces the integrated Ethernet switch on the eSP.

6-7 Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5100 shelf using an Ethernet cable

6-32

Required to allow communication to a remote ETS through the 565/5100/5200 communications network

6-8 Connecting to a data communications network

6-35

Required if the 5100 ring uses CWDM OMX.

6-9 Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk 6-37 Switch

Required for unamplified point-to-point networks with Optical Trunk Switches.

6-10 Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch

6-40

Required to monitor the status of the Enhanced Trunk Switch.

6-11 Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel

6-45

Required if you deploy passive devices.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-4 Installing peripheral cables Table 6-3 (Continued) Data communications connections procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

6-12 Connecting passive devices to the 6-61 Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations

Required if you deployed an Equipment Inventory Unit in a new installation.

6-13 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations

6-67

Required if you deployed an Equipment Inventory Unit in an existing installation.

6-14 Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel

6-71

Required if you deployed an Equipment Inventory Unit.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-5

Procedure 6-1 Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system Follow this procedure to connect 5100 shelf alarms, and telemetry equipment to the central office (CO) alarm system so that you can monitor and respond to environmental changes at the site. The central office alarms and telemetry (COTEL) port is an integral part of the maintenance panel card. Wire the telemetry connector, then loosen the captive thumbscrews and slide the maintenance panel card out halfway to plug the wired telemetry connector into the telemetry port.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Do not remove the COTEL card. It is not hot-swappable

For more information on 5100 hardware, see “5100 shelf” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-6 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-1 (continued) Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system

Requirements Table 6-4 lists the tools and materials required to connect the maintenance panel to telemetry equipment and to the central office alarms system. Table 6-4 Tools and materials for connecting the maintenance panel to the central office alarm system Item

Quantity

Supplied

2 mm slot screwdriver

1

no

24 AWG insulated wire

As required

no

36-pin telemetry connector

1

yes (included with the 5100 shelf Installation kit NTPM44AA)

Telemetry cable

2

yes (included in the 1U APRS rectifier kit)

Wire strippers

1

no

Ferrite choke

2

yes (included in the 1U APRS rectifier kit)

√

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-7 Procedure 6-1 (continued) Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system

Table 6-5 lists the signal assignments of the telemetry connector pins for the 5100 shelf. Refer to this table to wire the telemetry connector. Table 6-5 Telemetry connector pin signal assignments for the 5100 Pin Signal

Pin Signal

1

CO Visual Critical (common)

19

CO Audible Minor (norm. closed)

2

CO Visual Critical (norm. open)

20

Telemetry Output 1 (common)

3

CO Visual Critical (norm. closed)

21

Telemetry Output 1(norm. open)

4

CO Visual Major (common)

22

Telemetry Output 1 (norm. closed)

5

CO Visual Major (norm. open)

23

Telemetry Output 2 (common)

6

CO Visual Major (norm. closed)

24

Telemetry Output 2 (norm. open)

7

CO Visual Minor (common)

25

Telemetry Output 3 (common)

8

CO Visual Minor (norm. open)

26

Telemetry Output 3 (norm. open)

9

CO Visual Minor (norm. closed)

27

Telemetry Output 4 (common)

10

CO Audible Critical (common)

28

Telemetry Output 4 (norm. open)

11

CO Audible Critical (norm. open)

29

Telemetry Input 1

12

CO Audible Critical (norm. closed) 30

Telemetry Input 2

13

CO Audible Major (common)

31

Telemetry Input 3

14

CO Audible Major (norm. open)

32

Telemetry Input 4

15

CO Audible Major (norm. closed)

33

Telemetry Input 5

16

Telemetry Input Return

34

Telemetry Input 6

17

CO Audible Minor (common)

35

Telemetry Input 7

18

CO Audible Minor (norm. open)

36

Telemetry Input 8

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-8 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-1 (continued) Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system

Expected results When you complete this procedure, the 5100 shelf is connected to the central office alarms system, and the telemetry alarms are connected.

Action Step

Action

1

Remove the orange telemetry connector from the shelf accessories package. OM1055t

1

18

19

36

2

Identify the pins on the connector that you want to wire. Refer to Table 1-17, in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180, for the connector pin assignments.

3

To wire a connector pin, insert a 2 mm slot screwdriver into the square beside the pin that you want to wire. Pry the metal bar over, insert 10 mm (0.4 in.) wire into the pin, and remove the screwdriver. Note: If you are making telemetry connections to a 1U APRS, use the telemetry cables that are supplied with the 1U APRS rectifier kit. For the color coding of the 1U APRS telemetry wires, refer to Table 23-3 in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102. Refer to Procedure 6-3, “Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier”.

4

Repeat step 3 to make other connections.

5

Loosen the captive thumbscrews on the maintenance panel faceplate, and slide the maintenance panel card out halfway as shown in Figure 6-1 on page 6-10. (You may have to jiggle the card slightly to the left and right before you can slide it out.)

6

Insert the wired telemetry connector into the orange telemetry port, so that the telemetry wires are on top of the maintenance panel card (as shown in Figure 6-1 on page 6-10).

7

Use the 2 mm slot screwdriver to secure the retaining screws at either end of the telemetry connector to the telemetry port. (See Figure 6-1 on page 6-10.) —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-9 Procedure 6-1 (continued) Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system Step

Action

8

If you

Then

have made a telemetry connections to a 1U APRS rectifier

place a ferrite choke around each telemetry cable. (See Note 1 and Note 2.)

have not made a telemetry connections to a 1U APRS rectifier

go to step 9

Note 1: Put the ferrite choke around each 1U APRS telemetry cable only. Note 2: Place the ferrite chokes near the telemetry connector, so that they fit inside the shelf when the maintenance panel card is put back in place. See Figure 6-1 on page 6-10 for ferrite choke location. 9

Slide the maintenance panel card slowly back into place, taking care not to pinch the telemetry cables. (When the maintenance panel card is in place, the cables are routed as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-10).

10

Route and secure the COTEL cables from the 5100 shelf along the right-hand side of the rack (as you face the shelf), using tie-wraps or lacing cord to secure.

11

Tighten the captive thumbscrews on the maintenance panel faceplate to secure the card. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-10 Installing peripheral cables Figure 6-1 Securing the telemetry connector to the telemetry port OM1102t

Figure 6-2 Telemetry cable routing OM1101t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-11

Procedure 6-2 Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS rectifier Follow this procedure to connect an external power alarm to a 3U APRS rectifier. For more information on rectifiers, see “Rectifiers” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

ATTENTION The telemetry alarm port on most rectifiers shipped with the 3U AC Power Rectifier Shelf kit (NT0H44AH) can be set by the user to normally closed (NC) or normally open (N0). However, some rectifiers are shipped with the port fixed to normally open. In this case, you must install a transistor to switch the port setting to normally closed. Note that, if the port is set to normally open, an alarm is raised when the port is connected to ground.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements Table 6-6 lists the tools and materials required for completing this procedure. Table 6-6 Tools and materials for connecting external power alarms to a 3U APRS Item

Quantity

Supplied

Wire strippers

1

no

24 AWG insulated copper wire (ETSI equivalent: 0.2 mm2)

As required

no

Flat head screwdriver (slotted) 3/32 in.

1

no

√

Note: You may also require a transistor. For details, see the ATTENTION on page 6-11. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-12 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-2 (continued) Connecting an external power alarm to a 3U APRS rectifier

Action Step

Action

1

Locate the external alarm terminal block on the back of the rectifier chassis.

2

Measure and cut lengths of 24 AWG insulated copper wire to reach from the alarm terminal connectors on the rectifier to the maintenance panel on the 5100 shelf.

3

Strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from each end of the 24 AWG wires.

4

Connect the wires to the appropriate alarm connections on the rectifier alarm terminal block. See Figure 6-3 on page 6-12. Loosen the screws (they are not removable), and place the 24 AWG wire in the hole. Tighten the screw. Note: For pinout information consult the manufacturers installation documentation.

5

Route the alarm wires along the bottom of the rectifier chassis to the equipment rack and secure the wires using lacing cord or tie wraps.

6

Follow the instruction in the ATTENTION on page 6-11, if applicable. Then continue with this step. Connect the other ends of the alarm wires to external power alarm equipment, routing and securing the wires along the side of the equipment rack using tie wraps or lacing cord to secure the wires. —end—

Figure 6-3 Rectifier terminals for alarm connections OM0101p

0V J4 Alm Out

J4 Alm Rtn

–48V PS2

PS1

0V J4 Alm Out

J4 Alm Rtn

-48V

PS2

PS1

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-13

Procedure 6-3 Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier Follow this procedure to connect telemetry alarms on a 5100 to a 1U APRS rectifier. For more information on rectifiers, see “Rectifiers” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Each 1U APRS rectifier module has a locking connector on the front. Pins 4 and 5 are the alternating current (ac) power alarm connectors, and pins 1 and 2 are the fan and dc power alarm connectors. Figure 6-4 shows the pinout of the alarm connector on the 1U APRS rectifier module. Figure 6-4 1U APRS alarm connector

Pin number

6 5 4 3 2 1

The 5100 shelf raises an alarm if there is a loss of power, so it is optional to connect these pins. However, connecting these alarms allows you to monitor failures in alternating current (ac) power, direct current (dc) power, and internal rectifier module fans. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-14 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-3 (continued) Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier

Table 6-7 show the relay connectivity during normal operating conditions, and failure conditions. Table 6-7 Logic diagram for 1U APRS alarm relays Condition

AC OK relay

ac power

fan

dc power

OK

OK

OK

Failed

N/A

N/A

OK

OK

Failed

OK

Failed

OK

OK

Failed

Failed

pin 5 (N/O)

pin4 (COM)

DC/FAN OK relay pin 2 (N/O)

pin 1 (COM)

N/O = normally open COM = common

Table 6-8 lists the connectors on the 1U APRS alarm connector. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-15 Procedure 6-3 (continued) Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier Table 6-8 Alarm connectors on the 1U APRS Label

Pin number

Wire color

AC OK

Description Pins 4 and 5 are relay contact points used to indicate the status of the ac power present at the rectifier. The points are rated for a maximum current of 1 A. Use these pins to connect to the telemetry inputs on the 5100 maintenance panel card.

AC OK N/C

6

—

The Normally Closed pin for the AC OK relay (Not used)

AC OK N/O

5

white/blue

The Normally Open pin for the AC OK relay

COM

4

blue

The COM pin for the AC OK relay contact points (see Table 6-7). Pin 4 is disconnected from pin 5 (N/O) when ac power is present. Pin 4 is connected to Pin 5 (N/O) when ac power fails.

DC/FAN OK

Pins 1 and 2 are relay contact points used to indicate the status of the internal fan and dc power supply. The points are rated for a maximum current of 1 A. Use these pins to connect to the telemetry inputs on the 5100 maintenance panel card.

DC/FAN OK N/C

3

—

The Normally Closed pin for the DC/FAN OK relay (Not used)

DC/FAN OK N/O

2

white/orange The Normally Open pin for the DC/FAN OK relay

COM

1

orange

The COM pin for the DC/FAN OK relay contact points (see Table 6-7). Pin 1 is disconnected from pin 2 (N/O) when • ac power is present and • the fan is operating and • dc output voltage is within normal operating range. Pin 1 is connected to pin 2 (N/O) when • ac power is present and • the fan is not operating, or the dc power has failed —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-16 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-3 (continued) Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier

Requirements Table 6-9 lists the tools and materials required for completing this procedure. Table 6-9 Tools and materials for completing this procedure Item

Quantity

Supplied

Telemetry cable

2

yes (included in the 1U APRS rectifier kit)

Wire cutters

1

no

Cable ties

as required

no

√

Note: For details on the 1U APRS rectifier kit, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.

Action Step

Action

1

If the terminal block cover is in place, remove the cover. a. Remove the screw that secures the cover to the module. The screw is located between the alarms connector and the indicators lamps, on the right side of the module. b. Pull the cover away from the module. The cover pivots on a flange on the left side, that is inserted into the grill slot on the left side of the terminal block.

2

Push the telemetry plug into the alarm connector until it clicks into place.

3

Route the cables across the module, to the right side of the rack, and secure them to the cable tie mount on the right side of the rectifier.

4

Measure the minimum length of cable required to reach the 5100 shelf, and cut the cables to size. Note: The recommended location for the 1U APRS rectifier is in the first set of empty mounting holes directly above the 5100 shelf it is powering. The cable should be cut with enough slack to prevent tension in the wires after routing.

5

Repeat step 1 to step 4 for the alarm cable on each 1U APRS rectifier module. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-17 Procedure 6-3 (continued) Connecting telemetry alarms to a 1U APRS rectifier Step

Action

6

Connect the other end of the cables to the telemetry equipment. Follow Procedure 6-1 “Connecting 5100 shelf alarms and telemetry equipment to the central office alarm system”, in this chapter.

7

Install the terminal block cover: a. If the terminal cover has never been installed, first remove the screw that secures the cover to the module. The screw is located between the alarms connector and the indicators lamps, on the right side of the module. b. Insert the flange on the left side of the cover into the grill slot located directly to the left of the terminal block. c. Align the hole in the right side of the cover with the screw hole in the module. d. Insert the screw into the hole and tighten the screw. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-18 Installing peripheral cables

Procedure 6-4 Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable Follow this procedure to set up Ethernet 10Base-T 2X messaging between two 5100 shelves sharing the same site and hubbing group. For details on data communications, see “Data communications in the 565/5100/5200 network” in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. For more information on 5100 hardware, see “5100 shelf” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements You must determine the length and type of cross-over Ethernet cable in order to complete this procedure. See Table 6-10 for cable types. For pinout information for cross-over cables, see Cable pinouts and specifications on page 6-19. Table 6-10 Ethernet cable types Type of wiring

Length

Use

Cross-over (shielded)

2.15 m (7 ft)

Used to connect two components in the same rack.

4.5 m (15 ft)

Used to connect two components in different racks.

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-19 Procedure 6-4 (continued) Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable

Cable pinouts and specifications See Table 6-11 for signal connection information for the RJ45 plugs at each end of a cross-over cable. Table 6-11 RJ45 (cross-over) cable specifications RJ45 plug

8

1

Pin (End 1)

Signal

Pin (End 2)

1

RXD+

3

2

RXD–

6

3

TXD+

1

4

no connection

no connection

5

no connection

no connection

6

TXD–

2

7

no connection

no connection

8

no connection

no connection

Expected results When you complete this procedure •

you can view system management information by connecting the System Manager computer to one 5100 shelf in the network

•

the connection is made between two powered 5100 shelves, and the Link indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 2X port comes on and stays on

Action Step

Action Note: Regardless of which type of Shelf Processor is equipped in the shelf (Shelf Processor [SP] S0H60NAD1A or Enhanced Shelf Processor [eSP] NT0H41AB), you use the same port as indicated throughout Procedure 6-8 (10Base-T 2X). Bear in mind, however, that if the shelf is equipped with an eSP, the System Manager user interface shows 100BaseT (not 10BaseT) for the port. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-20 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-4 (continued) Connecting two shelves with a cross-over Ethernet cable Step

Action

1

You must enable the 10Base-T 2X port as well as the 10Base-T 2X port alarm on both shelves that you plan to connect with a cross-over Ethernet cable. By default, the 10Base-T 2X port is enabled and the 10Base-T 2X port alarm is disabled. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port, refer to Procedure 1-27, “Provisioning Ethernet and serial ports” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port alarm, refer to Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning Ethernet port alarms” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

2

Plug one end of a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of one 5100 shelf.

3

Plug the other end of the shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the second 5100 shelf.

When the connection is made between two powered 5100 shelves, the Link indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 2X port comes on and stays on. 4

Route and secure the Ethernet cross-over cable from the 10Base-T 2X port along the side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-21

Procedure 6-5 Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology) Follow this procedure to set up intershelf messaging in a site that is equipped with an Ethernet hub (see Figure 6-5). When you complete this procedure, intershelf messaging is set up and you can view system management information by connecting the System Manager computer to one 5100 shelf in the network. For details on data communications, see “Data communications in the 565/5100/5200 network” in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. For more information on 5100 hardware, see “5100 shelf” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements Before you begin this procedure, you must have completed “Installing an Ethernet hub” in the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book. You must determine the quantity and type of Ethernet cables to complete this procedure. See Table 6-12 for cable types. See Table 6-13 on page 6-22 for your Ethernet equipment requirements. For pinout information for cross-over cables, see Cable pinouts and specifications on page 6-23. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-22 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-5 (continued) Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology) Table 6-12 Ethernet cable types Type of wiring

Length

Use

Straight-through

2.75 m (9 ft)

Used to connect a 5100 shelf to the System Manager computer.

Cross-over (shielded) 2.15 m (7 ft)

Used to connect two components in the same rack.

4.5 m (15 ft)

Used to connect two components in different racks.

Table 6-13 Ethernet cable requirements Number of shelves at the site

Ethernet cables required

Number of shelves at the site

Ethernet hub required? Cross-over (shielded) Straight-through (from each shelf to the hub) (to the DCN device) 2.15 m (7 ft)

4.5 m (15 ft)

2.75 m (9 ft)

2

no

1

N/A

1

2

3

yes

2 or 3

1 or 0

1

3

4

yes

3

1

1

4

5

yes

3

2

1

5

6

yes

3

3

1

6

7

yes

3

4

1

7

8

yes

3

5

1

8

Note 1: If the shelf is equipped with a Shelf Processor, you must follow the requirements listed in Table 6-13. Note 2: If the shelf is equipped with an Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP) you can use either a cross-over cable or a straight-through cable to connect to the Ethernet hub or the data communications network (DCN) device. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-23 Procedure 6-5 (continued) Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology)

Cable pinouts and specifications The maximum cable length is 100 m (300 ft). See Table 6-14 for signal connection information for the RJ45 plugs at each end of a shielded Ethernet straight-through cable. Table 6-14 RJ45 (shielded Ethernet straight-through) cable specifications RJ45 plug

8

1

Pin (End 1)

Signal

Pin (End 2)

1

RXD+

1

2

RXD–

2

3

TXD+

3

4

no connection

4

5

no connection

5

6

TXD–

6

7

no connection

7

8

no connection

8

See Table 6-15 for signal connection information for the RJ45 plugs at each end of a cross-over cable. Use a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the 10Base-T 2X port on the maintenance panel to the Ethernet hub. Table 6-15 RJ45 (Ethernet cross-over) cable specifications RJ45 plug

8

1

Pin (End 1)

Signal

Pin (End 2)

1

RXD+

3

2

RXD–

6

3

TXD+

1

4

no connection

no connection

5

no connection

no connection

6

TXD–

2

7

no connection

no connection

8

no connection

no connection

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-24 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-5 (continued) Connecting two or more shelves to an Ethernet hub (hubbed topology)

Action Step

Action Note: Regardless of which type of Shelf Processor is equipped in the shelf (Shelf Processor [SP] S0H60NAD1A or Enhanced Shelf Processor [eSP] NT0H41AB), you use the same port as indicated throughout this procedure (10Base-T 2X). Bear in mind, however, that if the shelf is equipped with an eSP, the System Manager user interface shows 100BaseT (not 10BaseT) for the port.

1

Make sure that you follow the Ethernet cable requirements (Table 6-13, in particular Note 1 and Note 2) based on whether the shelf is equipped with a Shelf Processor or an Enhanced Shelf Processor.

2

You must enable the 10Base-T 2X port as well as the 10Base-T 2X port alarm. By default, the 10Base-T 2X port is enabled and the 10Base-T 2X port alarm is disabled. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port, refer to Procedure 1-27, “Provisioning Ethernet and serial ports” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. To enable the 10Base-T 2X port alarm, refer to Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning Ethernet port alarms” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

3

Plug one end of a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into an Ethernet port of the Ethernet hub.

4

Route the shielded Ethernet cross-over cable from the Ethernet hub to the destination 5100 shelf.

5

Route and secure the Ethernet cross-over cable from the 10Base-T 2X port along the side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord.

6

Plug the other end of the shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the 5100 shelf.

7

Repeat step 1 to step 6 for all the 5100 shelves in the site that must be connected to an Ethernet hub.

When you make the connection between a powered 5100 shelf and a powered Ethernet hub, the Link indicator lamp next to the 10Base-T 2X port of the shelf comes on and stays on. 8

Follow the procedure to set up the Intra Site Connection Misconfiguration alarm in Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, 323-1701-542. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-25 Figure 6-5 Intrasite communications using an Ethernet hub OM4066

DCN

Enet1

Enet2

565/5100/ 5200

Ethernet hub

Enet1 Enet2 565/5100/ 5200

Enet1

Enet2

565/5100/ 5200

Gateway NE

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-26 Installing peripheral cables

Procedure 6-6 Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology) Follow this procedure to set up intershelf messaging between two or more shelves each equipped with an Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP). Release 10.0 offers the integrated Ethernet switch feature on the eSP. You connect the shelves using cross-over Ethernet cables or straight-through cables. If you want to connect two or more shelves that are equipped with a Shelf Processor (SP), follow Procedure 6-5. When you complete this procedure, intershelf messaging is set up and you can view system management information by connecting the System Manager computer to one 5100 shelf in the network. For details on data communications, see “Data communications in the 565/5100/5200 network” in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. For more information on 5100 hardware, see “5100 shelf” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements Make sure that the shelves that you want to connect all include an Enhanced Shelf Processor (eSP) with Release 10.0 software. For ordering information, see Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. You can use shielded Ethernet cross-over cables or straight-through cables to connect the shelves. You must determine the quantity and type of Ethernet cables to complete this procedure. See Table 6-16 for Ethernet cable lengths. For pinout information for cross-over cables, see Table 6-17. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-27 Procedure 6-6 (continued) Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology) Table 6-16 Ethernet cable types Type of wiring

Length

Use

Cross-over (shielded) 2.15 m (7 ft)

Used to connect two components in the same rack.

4.5 m (15 ft)

Used to connect two components in different racks.

See Table 6-17 for signal connection information for the RJ45 plugs at each end of a cross-over cable. Use a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable to connect the 10Base-T 2X port on the maintenance panels. Table 6-17 RJ45 (Ethernet cross-over) cable specifications RJ45 plug

8

1

Pin (End 1)

Signal

Pin (End 2)

1

RXD+

3

2

RXD–

6

3

TXD+

1

4

no connection

no connection

5

no connection

no connection

6

TXD–

2

7

no connection

no connection

8

no connection

no connection

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-28 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-6 (continued) Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology)

Action Step

Action Note: Regardless of which type of Shelf Processor is equipped in the shelf (Shelf Processor [SP] S0H60NAD1A or Enhanced Shelf Processor [eSP] NT0H41AB), you use the same port as indicated throughout this procedure (10Base-T 1X and 10Base-T 2X). Bear in mind, however, that if the shelf is equipped with an eSP, the System Manager user interface shows 100BaseT (not 10BaseT) for the port.

1

You must enable the 10Base-T 1X port, 10Base-T 2X port, 10Base-T 2X port alarm, and 10Base-T 2X port alarm on the shelves that you plan to connect with a cross-over Ethernet cable. To enable the 10Base-T 1X port and 10Base-T 2X port, refer to Procedure 1-27, “Provisioning Ethernet and serial ports” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. To enable the 10Base-T 1X port alarm and the 10Base-T 2X port alarm, refer to Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning Ethernet port alarms” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

2

If the configuration

Then

includes a single or dual gateway connect the 5100 shelf to the device on network element (GNE) the data communications network (DCN) by performing step 3 does not include a GNE 3

4

go to step 8

Plug one end of the shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into the 10Base-T 1X port of the first 5100 shelf in the chain. •

for a single GNE, see Figure 6-6

•

for a dual GNE, see Figure 6-7

Plug the other end of the shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into the device in the data communications network (DCN). •

for a single GNE, see Figure 6-6

•

for a dual GNE, see Figure 6-7

When the connection is made between a powered 5100 shelf and a device on the DCN, the Link indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 1X port comes on and stays on. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-29 Procedure 6-6 (continued) Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology) Step

Action

5

If the configuration includes

Then

a single GNE

go to step 8

dual GNEs

perform step 6 and step 7 for the last 5100 in the chain. Then continue with step 8.

6

Plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 1X port of the last 5100 shelf in the chain. •

7

for a dual GNE, see Figure 6-7 on page 6-31

Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the device in the data communications network (DCN). •

for a dual GNE, see Figure 6-7 on page 6-31

When the connection is made between a powered 5100 shelf and a device on the DCN, the Link indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 1X port comes on and stays on. 8

9

Plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the first 5100 shelf in the chain. •

for a single GNE, see Figure 6-6 on page 6-30

•

for a dual GNE, see Figure 6-7 on page 6-31

Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the second 5100 shelf in the chain. •

for a single GNE, see Figure 6-6 on page 6-30

•

for a dual GNE, see Figure 6-7 on page 6-31

When the connection is made between two powered 5100 shelves, the Link indicator lamp next to each 10Base-T 2X port comes on and stays on. 10

Plug one end of an Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 1X port of the second 5100 shelf in the chain.

11

Plug the other end of the Ethernet cable into the 10Base-T 2X port of the third 5100 shelf in the chain. •

for a single GNE, see Figure 6-6 on page 6-30

•

for a dual GNE, see Figure 6-7 on page 6-31

•

for no GNE, see Figure 6-8 on page 6-31

When the connection is made between two powered 5100 shelves, the Link indicator lamp next to the 10Base-T 1X port and the 10Base-T 2X port comes on and stays on. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-30 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-6 (continued) Connecting two or more shelves through an integrated Ethernet switch (chained topology) Step

Action

12

Route and secure the Ethernet cross-over cables from the 10Base-T 1X port and 10Base-T 2X port along the side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord.

13

Follow the procedure to set up the Intra Site Connection Misconfiguration alarm in Trouble Clearing and Alarm Reference Guide, 323-1701-542. —end—

Figure 6-6 5100 daisy chain topology, single GNE OM4067

DCN

2X

1X

2X

1

GNE

Non GNE

565/5100/ 5200

1X

2

565/5100/ 5200

2X

Non GNE

1X

3 565/5100/ 5200

Legend 1X = 10Base–T 1X = Enet 1 2X = 10Base–T 2X = Enet 2

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-31 Figure 6-7 5100 daisy chain topology, dual GNE OM4068

DCN

2X

1X

2X

1

GNE

2

Non GNE

565/5100/ 5200

1X

2X

3

GNE

565/5100/ 5200

1X

565/5100/ 5200

Legend 1X = 10Base–T 1X = Enet 1 2X = 10Base–T 2X = Enet 2

Figure 6-8 5100 daisy chain topology, no GNE OM3104t

2X

1X GNE

1

2X

Non GNE

1X

2

2X

Non GNE

1X

3

Legend 1X = 10Base–T 1X = Enet 1 2X = 10Base–T 2X = Enet 2

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-32 Installing peripheral cables

Procedure 6-7 Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5100 shelf using an Ethernet cable Follow this procedure to make an Ethernet connection between the Enhanced Trunk Switch shelf and the 5100 shelf. The connection being made in this procedure allows you to access remote ETS Switches and Comms modules. The communication to the remote ETS Switch and Comms module is through the 565/5100/5200 communications network. Perform this procedure to avoid having to connect the remote ETS shelves directly into the data communications network (DCN). This procedure involves connecting the ETS shelf directly to the 10Base-T 1X port of the 5100 shelf. However, you can also use an Ethernet hub as a middle access point for this Ethernet connection to the 5100 shelf. This procedure does not include steps for such a connection. For more information on the “Enhanced Trunk Switch”, refer to Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-33 Procedure 6-7 (continued) Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5100 shelf using an Ethernet cable

Requirements Table 6-18 lists the tools and materials you require make the Ethernet connection from the ETS shelf to the 5100 shelf. Table 6-18 Tools and materials for connecting the ETS shelf to the 5100 shelf using an Ethernet cable Item

Quantity

Supplied

Straight shielded CAT5 Ethernet cable of the required length

1

No

√

Action Step

Action Note: This procedure involves connecting the ETS shelf directly to the 10BASE-T 1X port of the 5100 shelf. However, you can also use an Ethernet hub as a middle access point for this Ethernet connection to the 5100 shelf. For details on locating the required hub connections, contact your network administrator. (This procedure does not include steps for such a connection.)

1

Locate the Ethernet port that is labeled Ethernet at the rear of the ETS shelf.

2

Locate the Ethernet port that is labeled 10BASE-T 1X on the maintenance panel at the front right side of the 565/5100/5200 shelf. Note: The 10BASE-T 1X port is located on the right side of the 5100 shelf.

3

Select the straight Ethernet cable long enough to reach the ports identified in step 1 and step 2.

4

Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port at the rear of the ETS shelf.

5

Route the Ethernet cable to the front of the rack, preferably using an external routing management device provided by the customer. If no routing management device is available, bring the Ethernet cable to the front of the rack and use the vertical fiber management brackets of the 5100 shelf to hold the Ethernet cable. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-34 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-7 (continued) Connecting the ETS shelf to the 5100 shelf using an Ethernet cable Step

Action

6

Route the Ethernet cable to the top or bottom of the rack using the 5100 shelf vertical fiber management brackets or any other routing management device provided by the customer. Routing the Ethernet cable to the top or bottom of the rack depends on the location of the 5100 shelf where the Ethernet cable will be connected (the port identified in step 2).

7

Route the Ethernet cable from the left to the right side of the shelf using the fiber management trough at the bottom of the 5100 shelf, or using an external fiber management device provided by the customer (used with 5200 or 5100 shelves).

8

On the right side of the 5100 shelf, use the shelf vertical fiber management brackets or any other routing management device provided by the customer to reach the Ethernet port 10BASE-T 1X identified in step 2.

9

Connect the end of the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port 10BASE-T 1X identified in step 2.

10

Repeat this procedure for all the ETS shelves in the network, connecting each of them to a 5100 shelf that is colocated with the ETS. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-35

Procedure 6-8 Connecting to a data communications network Follow this procedure to connect the gateway network element (GNE) 5100 shelf to a data communications network (DCN). For more information on 5100 hardware, see “5100 shelf” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements You must have a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable (RJ45 to RJ45) to connect 5100 shelves to a DCN. The cable is not supplied.

Expected results When you complete this procedure you can run the System Manager from a surveillance center or other remote management facility. Refer to the chapters titled “Commissioning the Photonic Trunk Switch” and “Commissioning a shelf” in Commissioning Procedures, 323-1701-220, for information on reserved IP addresses, remote connections, and external routing protocols. Follow Procedure 1-7 “Connecting locally to a commissioned shelf using Ethernet port 1 or port 2 and configuring DHCP (Windows XP/Vista/7)” and, if required, Procedure 1-8, “Connecting locally to a commissioned GNE shelf using Ethernet port 1 and configuring a static IP address (Windows XP/Vista/7)” in the “Installing the System Manager” chapter of Commissioning Procedures, 323-1701-220.

Action Step

Action

1

You must enable the 10Base-T 1X port alarm. To enable the 10Base-T 1X port alarm, refer to Procedure 1-26, “Provisioning Ethernet port alarms” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

2

Plug one end of a shielded Ethernet cross-over cable into a port on an Ethernet hub or router connected to a DCN. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-36 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-8 (continued) Connecting to a data communications network Step

Action

3

Plug the other end of the shielded cable to the 10Base-T 1X port of a 5100 shelf or Ethernet hub in a 5100 site.

When you connect a powered 5100 shelf to a powered Ethernet hub, the Link indicator lamp next to the 10Base-T 1X port of the shelf comes on and stays on. 4

Route and secure the Ethernet cross-over cable from the 10Base-T 1X port along the right-side of the frame using tie-wraps or lacing cord. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-37

Procedure 6-9 Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk Switch Follow this procedure to make alarm connections from each Optical Trunk Switch (OTS) to the 5100 COTEL (central office and telemetry) card. To make the alarm connections, follow the connector pinout diagram on the back of the module. For more information on the Optical Trunk Switch, see “Optical Trunk Switch” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements Table 6-19 lists the tools and materials required to make the alarm connections for the Optical Trunk Switch. Table 6-19 Tools and materials for making alarm connections Item

Quantity

Supplied

Miniature slot screwdriver

1

No

24 AWG insulated wire

As required

No

16-pin connector

2

Yes

Wire strippers

1

No

√

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-38 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-9 (continued) Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk Switch

Action Step

Action

1

Loosen the captive thumbscrews on the maintenance panel faceplate, and slide the maintenance panel card out halfway. (You may have to jiggle the card slightly to the left and right before you can slide it out.)

2

Locate the COTEL interface card (orange telemetry connector), and carefully remove it from the maintenance panel card.

1

18

19

36

3

Identify the pins on the connector that you want to wire. For the connector pin assignments, refer to Table 1-17 in Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.

4

Strip 7 mm (0.25 inc.) of insulation from both ends of all the wires that you want to use to connect the alarm telemetry pins of the OTS to the COTEL card.

5

To wire a connector pin on the OTS alarm pins, first locate and remove the green alarm block on the back of the OTS, using a small screw driver. To connect wires to the pins, you must pry the spring clamp open, and insert the wire into the pin socket that corresponds to the signal you want to connect. Then hold the wire in place and release the spring clamp on the side of the connector to secure the wire.

6

To wire a connector pin on the COTEL card, insert a 2 mm slot screwdriver into the square beside the pin that you want to wire. Pry the metal bar over, insert 10 mm (0.4 in.) wire into the pin, and remove the screwdriver. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-39 Procedure 6-9 (continued) Connecting alarms on the Optical Trunk Switch Step

Action

7

Make the following connections between the COTEL card and the OTS alarm telemetry pins: a. Connect the Major Switch pin on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch to pin 29 of the COTEL card. b. Connect the Primary Fail pin on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch to pin 30 of the COTEL card. c. Connect the STNBY/Power A or B Fail pin on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch to pin 31 of the COTEL card. d. Connect one connection of each relay on the back of the Optical Trunk Switch to pin 16 of the COTEL card.

8

Reinsert the wired OTS alarm block connector (green) on the back of the OTS, using a small screw driver.

9

Insert the wired telemetry COTEL connector into the orange telemetry port, so that the telemetry wires are on top of the maintenance panel card (as shown in Figure 6-1 on page 6-10).

10

Use the 2 mm slot screwdriver to secure the retaining screws at either end of the telemetry connector to the telemetry port. (See Figure 6-1 on page 6-10.)

11

Slide the maintenance panel card back slowly into place, taking care not to pinch the telemetry cables. (When the maintenance panel card is in place, the cables are routed as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-10).

12

Route and secure the COTEL cables from the 5100 shelf along the right-hand side of the rack (as you face the shelf), using tie-wraps or lacing cord to secure.

13

Tighten the captive thumbscrews on the maintenance panel faceplate to secure the card. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-40 Installing peripheral cables

Procedure 6-10 Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch Follow this procedure to make alarm connections from each Enhanced Trunk Switch to the 36-pin socket connectors of the 5100 central office and telemetry (COTEL) card. This procedure is required to monitor the status of the Enhanced Trunk Switch alarms using the 565/5100/5200 System Manager Interface.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

To make the alarm connections, follow the connector pinout of the ETS alarm telemetry block on the back of the ETS shelf. Table 6-20 on page 6-41 lists the pin assignment for the ETS alarm telemetry block and customized DB-25 cable (see Figure 6-9). Figure 6-9 Customized DB-25 cable (NT0H43RA) OM2594t

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-41 Procedure 6-10 (continued) Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch Table 6-20 Pin assignment for the ETS alarm telemetry block and customized DB-25 cable Signal description ETS alarm telemetry block pin number

Color code of open-ended connector on customized DB-25 cable (NT0H43RA)

Internal connection of customized DB-25 cable

2

Critical alarm

brown

-

3

Slot A (left) major alarm

red

-

4

Slot A (left) minor alarm

orange

-

5

Power A fail alarm

yellow

-

6

Power B fail alarm

green

-

7

Fan 1 alarm

blue

-

8

Fan 2 alarm

violet

-

12

Slot B major alarm

white/brown

-

13

Slot B minor alarm

white/red

-

15

Critical alarm return

white/yellow

to pin 16

16

Slot A major alarm return

white/green

to pin 17

17

Slot A minor alarm return

white/blue

to pin 18

18

Power A fail alarm return

white/violet

to pin 19

19

Power B fail alarm return

white/silver

to pin 20

20

Fan 1 alarm return

white/black/brown

to pin 21

21

Fan 2 alarm return

white/black/red

to pin 24

24

Slot B major alarm return

white/brown/green

to pin 25

25

Slot B minor alarm return

white/brown/blue

(connected with all other ground pins)

Note: The ETS Comms module is in slot A (left side of the ETS shelf) and the ETS Switch module is in slot B (right side of the ETS shelf). —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-42 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-10 (continued) Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch

Since the Fan alarms, Power fail alarms and the ETS Switch alarms are reported through the ETS Comms (Slot A alarms) as alarms, Ciena recommends that you connect only three of the alarms listed in Table 6-20 on page 6-41 as follows: •

Critical alarm

•

Slot A major alarm

•

Slot A minor alarm Note: The 5100 shelf maintenance panel includes five telemetry input ports.

This procedure requires the DB-25 customized cable (NT0H43RA), which can be ordered separately and which is also part of the ETS installation kit (NTUG90GH). The customized DB-25 cable is used to facilitate the connection from the ETS shelf alarm telemetry block to the 5100 maintenance panel (COTEL card). For more information on the “Enhanced Trunk Switch”, refer to Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Table 6-21 lists the tools and materials you require to make the alarm connections for the Enhanced Trunk Switch. Table 6-21 Tools and materials for making alarm connections Item

Quantity

Supplied

Miniature slot screwdriver

1

No

Customized DB-25 cable (NT0H43RA)

1

Yes (part of the ETS installation kit NTUG90GH, or orderable individually)

Wire strippers

1

No

√

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-43 Procedure 6-10 (continued) Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch

Action Step

Action

1

Locate the ETS shelf alarm telemetry block that is labeled sense alarm at the rear of the ETS shelf (DB-25 female connector).

2

Locate the 5100 maintenance panel where the telemetry connections are going to be made.

3

Take the customized DB-25 cable (NT0H43RA). Connect the male 25-pin connector of the customized cable to the ETS shelf alarm telemetry block located in step 1. Use the miniature screw driver to tighten the connector on the port (on the left and right side).

4

On the 5100 shelf, loosen the captive thumbscrews on the maintenance panel faceplate, and slide the maintenance panel card out halfway. (You may have to jiggle the card slightly to the left and right before you can slide it out.)

5

Locate the 36-pin connector (orange telemetry connector), and carefully remove it from the maintenance panel card. 1

18

19

36

6

Identify the pins on the connector that you want to wire. For pinout information, see Technical Specifications, 323-1701-180.

7

On the customized DB-25 cable, strip 7 mm (0.25 in.) of insulation from the four open-ended wires that you want to insert into the 36-pin connector. As shown in Table 6-20 on page 6-41, you will use the following open ended wires: brown, red, orange and one of the return wires (many choices available because they are all interconnected in the DB-25 customized cable). —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-44 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-10 (continued) Connecting alarms on the Enhanced Trunk Switch Step

Action

8

To wire a connector pin on the 36-pin connector, insert a 2 mm slot screwdriver into the square beside the pin that you want to wire. Pry the metal bar over, insert 10 mm (0.4 in.) wire into the pin, and remove the screwdriver.

9

Make the following connections. a. Critical alarm: connect the brown open wire of the customized DB-25 cable to pin 31 of the 36-pin connector (telemetry input 3). b. Major alarm: connect the red open wire of the customized DB-25 cable to pin 30 of the 36-pin connector (telemetry input 2). c. Minor alarm: connect the orange open wire of the customized DB-25 cable to pin 29 of the 36-pin connector (telemetry input 1). d. Return: connect one of the return wires of the customized DB-25 cable to pin 16 of the 36-pin connector (common return). Several choices of return wires are available on the customized DB-25 cable. For more information, refer to Table 6-21 on page 6-42.

10

When the four wires are connected, insert the wired telemetry 36-pin connector into the orange telemetry port so that the telemetry wires are on top of the maintenance panel card (see Figure 6-1 on page 6-10).

11

Use the 2 mm slot screwdriver to secure the retaining screws at either end of the telemetry connector to the telemetry port (see Figure 6-1 on page 6-10).

12

Slide the maintenance panel card back slowly into place, taking care not to pinch the telemetry cables. (When the maintenance panel card is in place, the cables are routed as shown in Figure 6-2 on page 6-10).

13

Route and secure the ETS to COTEL cable from the 5100 shelf along the right-hand side of the rack (as you face the shelf), using tie-wraps or lacing cord to secure.

14

Tighten the captive thumbscrews on the maintenance panel faceplate to secure the card.

15

Use Procedure 1-9, “Configuring telemetry ports and alarms” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310, to provision telemetry ports 1 to 3. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-45

Procedure 6-11 Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel 565/5100/5200 shelves support data communication between a shelf and the passive optical devices that are associated with the shelf. Inside the maintenance panel of each shelf are two OMX interface (OMXI) cards that allow the System Manager to inventory and monitor the equipment. Each passive optical device contains an identity card that carries information about that component. Data communication cables are used to connect an the passive devices listed in Table 6-22 to an OMX1 port. Table 6-22 Passive devices and data comm cable info Passive device

includes data comm cable

OMX

Yes

OMX 16CH DWDM

Yes

OSC splitter/coupler

Yes

OSC splitter/coupler with dual taps

No

Transponder Protection Tray

No

Transponder Protection Tray 10 channel, TPT-10 (NT0H59AC)

Yes

VOA tray

No

C&L splitter coupler

No

1310 nm splitter/coupler

No

The Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) can also be connected to an OMXI port on the maintenance panel. The Equipment Inventory Unit allows you to increase the number of optical passive devices that can be associated with a single 5100 shelf (from 4 to 19). Refer to Procedure 6-14, “Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel” to connect the EIU to the maintenance panel and Procedure 6-12, “Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations” to connect passive devices to the EIU. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-46 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-11 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel

Table 6-23 lists the specifications for each cable. Table 6-23 Data communication cables PEC

Length

Use

NT0H4345

Simplex RJ45-RJ45 Connect passive devices or Equipment Inventory Unit to the 1.5 m (60 in.) maintenance panel and connect passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit.

NT0H4322

Simplex RJ45-RJ45 Connect passive devices or Equipment Inventory Unit to the 2.98 m (117 in.) maintenance panel and connect passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit.

Follow this procedure to connect the data communications cable to the maintenance panel and route the cable to the tray. When you complete this procedure •

the data communications cable is connected to the optical multiplexer interface (OMXI) cards in the maintenance panel

•

the ferrite bead is attached to the data communications cable

•

the data communications cable is routed and connected in the equipment drawer

For more information on specific equipment drawers, see Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements You must have completed the procedures to mount a 5100 shelf (4 U high) in a rack or cabinet, before you begin this procedure. Refer to the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book for the required procedures. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-47 Procedure 6-11 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel

Table 6-24 lists the tools and materials required for connecting and routing the data communications cable. Table 6-24 Tools and materials for connecting and routing the data communications cable Item

Quantity

Supplied

Data communications cable (see Table 6-23 for correct cable type)

1

yes (see Note)

Ferrite bead

2

yes

Cable tie (tie wrap) (P0567226)

1 for the OMX 16CH DWDM

no

√

Note: The data communications cable may have to be ordered separately. For ordering details, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.

Prepare the following two labels for the data communications cables: •

West 1

•

East 1 Note: If you are connecting the cables to the bottom OMXI ports, prepare two labels that read West 2, and East 2.

Precautions Be sure to install the ferrite bead around the cable in the maintenance panel, to comply with Class B emissions requirements (see step 4).

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-48 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-11 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel

Action Step

Action

1

Insert the end of the data communications cable with the short leads through the access slot on the right side of the maintenance panel. For a list of cable types, see Table 6-23 on page 6-46.

2

Insert the west 1 connector into the OMXI WEST port (top) or west 2 connector into the OMXI WEST port (bottom) in the maintenance panel, as shown in Figure 6-10 on page 6-50. Note: You will connect the data communications cable from the west OMXI port to the west equipment drawer.

3

Insert the east 1 connector into the OMXI EAST port (top) or east 2 connector into the OMXI EAST port (bottom) in the maintenance panel, as shown in Figure 6-10 on page 6-50. Note: You will connect the data communications cable from the east OMXI port to the east equipment drawer.

4

Clamp the ferrite around the data communications cable, as shown in Figure 6-10 on page 6-50.

5

Place the ferrite in the maintenance panel.

6

Run the cables down the left side of the shelf through the vertical fiber brackets.

7

If you are connecting

Then go to

OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

step 16

any other equipment

step 8

8

9

Select your next step. If the passive device is equipped with a

Then go to

drawer that you pull open using latches

step 9

hinged door

step 12

Open the equipment drawer (west as indicated in step 2 or east as indicated step 3, as required) by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pulling the drawer toward you until it is fully open. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-49 Procedure 6-11 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel Step

Action

10

Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located at the front of the drawer, and route the cable, using the two tie-downs provided. For internal cable routing on equipment drawers that you pull toward you to open, see: •

Figure 6-11 on page 6-51 for OMX 1CH CWDM

•

Figure 6-12 on page 6-52 for OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH CWDM, OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps, OMX 4CH ITU CWDM, OMX 8CH ITU CWDM Note: For OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35ABA), go to step 12.

•

Figure 6-14 on page 6-54 for OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

•

Figure 6-15 on page 6-55 for OSC tray - without optical tap, OSC tray with optical tap, C&L splitter/coupler, 1310 nm splitter/coupler, and OSC tray - with dual optical taps

•

Figure 6-16 on page 6-56 for OSC tray - with dual optical taps, OSC tray - without optical tap, OSC tray - with optical tap, C&L splitter/coupler, and 1310 nm splitter/coupler

•

Figure 6-17 on page 6-57 for Transponder Protection Tray (four-filter)

•

Figure 6-18 on page 6-58 for Transponder Protection Tray (two-filter) Note: For Transponder Protection Tray (ten-filter) (NT0H59AC), go to step 12.

• 11

Figure 6-20 on page 6-60 for Discrete VOA

Allow sufficient slack in the data communications cable to allow the drawer to operate correctly. Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you slide the drawer back into place. Go to step 15.

12

Open the equipment drawer by unlocking the captive screws on the hinged door.

13

Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located on the left side of the faceplate (behind the door), and route the cable through the opening on the left side. For cable routing on equipment drawers equipped with a hinged door that you open, see: •

Figure 6-13 on page 6-53 for OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35ABA)

•

Figure 6-19 on page 6-59 for Transponder Protection Tray (ten filter) (NT0H59AC) —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-50 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-11 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the maintenance panel Step

Action

14

Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you close and lock the door.

15

Repeat from step 8 to connect the cable from the east OMXI port to the east equipment drawer. Then you have completed this procedure.

16

Unscrew the two lock-screws on the top side (left and right) of the front panel to open the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Then, pull down the front panel. See Figure 6-14 on page 6-54 for OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz.

17

Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located in the middle of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz, just over the OTS fiber connectors. Route the cable over the fiber connector slider adapters on the right side of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. The cable must go out of the module through the round aperture on the side of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Use a cable tie (tie wrap) to attach the data communications cable to the right top fastening hole inside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. For internal cable routing illustration, see Figure 6-14 on page 6-54.

18

Close the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz front panel by pulling up the panel, and securing the two external lock-screws. —end—

Figure 6-10 Cable connection to the 5100 maintenance panel DATA

EAST

LINK

OM1037t WEST

ESD

POWER B

10BASE-T 1X

CRITICAL

TIA/EIA-232/V.24 1 (DTE) MAJOR

ACO

GND

10BASE-T 2X

MINOR

OMXI

DATA

POWER

LINK

STATUS

TIA/EIA-232/V.24 2 (DCE)

OMXI west OMXI East

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-51 Figure 6-11 Routing of cable for the OMX 1CH CWDM OM0939p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-52 Installing peripheral cables Figure 6-12 Internal cable routing for the OMX 4CH CWDM OM0940p

The internal cable routing for the following is the same as the cable routing (for the OMX 4CH CWDM) shown in Figure 6-12, with one exception: •

OMX 4CH Enhanced

•

OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz

•

OMX 4CH CWDM

•

OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps

•

OMX 4CH ITU CWDM

•

OMX 8CH ITU CWDM

The exception is related to the design of OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/NTPM35AB) and OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA), all introduced in Release 11.0. These types of OMXs are equipped with a hinged door (not a pull-out drawer). The door protects a faceplate of ports. See Figure 6-13 on page 6-53 .

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-53 Figure 6-13 Equipment Inventory Interface port on OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU CWDM NTPM35BA OM3373

OMX 4CH ITU CWDM - 1471-1531 nm (NTPM35AA)

OMX 4CH ITU CWDM - 1551-1611 nm (NTPM35AB)

OMX 8CH ITU CWDM - 1471-1611 nm (NTPM35BA)

Route cable through left opening of OMX and then to Equipment Inventory Interface port. Connect cable.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-54 Installing peripheral cables Figure 6-14 Cable routing for the OMX 16CH DWDM OM2660p

Note: Cable routing for the OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz is similar to the cable routing for the OMX 16CH DWDM as shown in Figure 6-14.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-55 Figure 6-15 Interior view of the OSC tray - without optical tap OM2275t

The internal cable routing for the following is the same as the cable routing (for the OSC tray - without optical tap) shown in Figure 6-15: •

OSC tray - with optical tap

•

C&L splitter/coupler

•

1310 nm splitter/coupler

•

OSC tray - with dual optical taps

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-56 Installing peripheral cables Figure 6-16 Interior view of the OSC splitter/coupler with dual taps OM2670p

The internal cable routing for the following is the same as the cable routing (for the OSC tray - with dual taps) shown in Figure 6-16: •

OSC tray - without optical tap

•

OSC tray - with optical tap

•

C&L splitter/coupler

•

1310 nm splitter/coupler

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-57 Figure 6-17 Interior view of the Transponder Protection Tray (four filter) OM2276t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-58 Installing peripheral cables Figure 6-18 Interior view of the Transponder Protection Tray (two filter) OM2277t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-59 Figure 6-19 Equipment Inventory Interface port on Transponder Protection Tray, 10 filter (NT0H59AC) OM3352.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-60 Installing peripheral cables Figure 6-20 Interior view of the Discrete VOA tray OM2287p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-61

Procedure 6-12 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations Follow this procedure to connect the passive optical devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) using the NT0H4322 cable (9.8 ft) or the NT0H4345 cable (5 ft) and route the cable to the tray. For existing installations, refer to Procedure 6-13 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations. Refer to Procedure 6-14 Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel to connect the EIU to the maintenance panel. The EIU drawer allows up to 16 passive devices to be inventoried per shelf. The EIU is connected to the shelf maintenance panel (5200 or 5100), then the individual passive devices are connected to the EIU. Data communication cables are used to connect the passive devices listed in Table 6-25 to an OMX1 port. Table 6-25 Passive devices and data communications cable information Passive device

Includes data communications cable

OMX

Yes

OMX 16CH DWDM

Yes

OSC splitter/coupler

Yes

OSC splitter/coupler with dual taps

No

Transponder Protection Tray

No

Transponder Protection Tray 10 filter, TPT-10 (NT0H59AC)

Yes

VOA tray

No

C&L splitter coupler

No

1310 nm splitter/coupler

No —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-62 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-12 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations

When you complete this procedure •

the EIU data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) is connected between the EIU and the passive device

•

the data communications cable is routed and connected in the equipment drawer

For more information on specific equipment drawers, see Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements Before you begin this procedure, you must have completed the procedures to mount a 5100 shelf (4 U high) in a rack or cabinet. Also, you must have completed the procedure for mounting an EIU and the passive devices. Refer to the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book for the required procedures. Table 6-26 lists the tools and materials required for completing this procedure. Table 6-26 Tools and materials for connecting and routing the data communications cable for the EIU Item

Quantity

Supplied

Data communications cable (see Table 6-23 for correct cable type)

1

yes (see Note 1)

Labels (see Note 2)

as required

no

Cable tie (tie wrap) (P0567226)

1 for the OMX 16CH DWDM

no

√

Note 1: The data communications cable may have to be ordered separately. For ordering details, see “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. Note 2: When connecting equipment to the EIU, it is recommended that you label the individual cables with the equipment type to which it is connected. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-63 Procedure 6-12 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

Action Step

Action

1

Insert the data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) into the appropriate port (labelled 1 to 16) on the front of the EIU (see Figure 6-21 on page 6-66).

CAUTION Risk of raising the “Unassigned OSID” alarm

Bear in mind the EIU port/direction restrictions when you connect passive devices. Connect a west-facing passive device to ports 1 to 8 of an EIU. Connect an east-facing passive device to ports 9 to 16 of an EIU. If you connect passive devices to the incorrect port, the system raises the “Unassigned OSID” alarm. Note: It is recommended that you label the cable with the equipment type to which the cable will be connected. 2

Run the cable through the vertical fiber brackets.

3

If you are connecting

Then go to

OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

step 11

any other equipment

step 4

4

Select your next step. If the passive device is equipped with a

Then go to

drawer that you pull open using latches

step 5

hinged door

step 8 —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-64 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-12 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations Step

Action

5

Open the equipment drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pulling the drawer toward you until it is fully open.

6

Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located at the front of the drawer, and route the cable, using the two tie-downs provided. For internal cable routing illustrations, see: •

Figure 6-11 on page 6-51 for OMX 1CH CWDM

•

Figure 6-12 on page 6-52 for OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH CWDM, OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps, OMX 4CH ITU CWDM, OMX 8CH ITU CWDM Note: For OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35ABA), go to step 8.

•

Figure 6-14 on page 6-54 for OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

•

Figure 6-15 on page 6-55 for OSC tray - without optical tap, OSC tray with optical tap, C&L splitter/coupler, 1310 nm splitter/coupler, and OSC tray - with dual optical taps

•

Figure 6-16 on page 6-56 for OSC tray - with dual optical taps, OSC tray - without optical tap, OSC tray - with optical tap, C&L splitter/coupler, and 1310 nm splitter/coupler

•

Figure 6-17 on page 6-57 for Transponder Protection Tray (two-filter)

•

Figure 6-18 on page 6-58 for Transponder Protection Tray (four-filter) Note: For Transponder Protection Tray (ten-filter) (NT0H59AC), go to step 8.

• 7

Figure 6-20 on page 6-60 for Discrete VOA

Close the drawer. Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you slide the drawer back into place. You have completed this procedure.

8

Open the equipment drawer by unlocking the captive screws on the hinged door.

9

Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located on the left side of the faceplate (behind the door), and route the cable through the opening on the left side. For cable routing on equipment drawers equipped with a hinged door that you open, see: •

Figure 6-13 on page 6-53 for OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) and OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35ABA)

•

Figure 6-19 on page 6-59 for Transponder Protection Tray (ten filter) (NT0H59AC) —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-65 Procedure 6-12 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations Step

Action

10

Make sure that the cable does not pinch as you close and lock the door. You have completed this procedure.

11

Unscrew the two lock-screws on the top side (left and right) of the front panel of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Then pull down the front panel.

12

Insert the RJ45 connector into the port located in the middle of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz, just over the OTS fiber connectors. Route the cable over the fiber connector slider adapters on the right side of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. The cable must exit the module through the round aperture on the side of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Use a cable tie (tie wrap) to attach the data communications cable to the right top fastening hole inside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. For internal cable routing, see Figure 6-14 on page 6-54.

13

Pull up the panel and secure the two external lock-screws to close the front panel. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-66 Installing peripheral cables Figure 6-21 Front panel of the EIU OM3664.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-67

Procedure 6-13 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations Use this procedure to reconfigure existing connections between passive devices and the maintenance panel to connections from the passive devices to an Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) connected to the maintenance panel. For existing installations, refer to Procedure 6-12 Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements Before you start this procedure, you must •

know which shelf in the rack the EIU will be connected to

•

know which shelf maintenance panel port the EIU will be connected to

•

know which passive devices will be connected to the EIU

•

know which EIU port to connect the passive devices to Note: The SMI software internally labels EIU ports 1 to 8 as “West plane” and EIU ports 9 to 16 as “East plane”. As a result, the “Unassigned Optical System Identifier” minor, nsa alarm is raised when the same band and DWDM type OMXs are connected to the same EIU plane. To avoid this, you can choose to connect the same band and same DWDM type OMXs in different EIU planes.

•

have the correct number of data communications cables (NT0H4322 [9.8 ft] or NT0H4345 [5 ft]): — one data communication cable to connect the EIU to the shelf maintenance panel — one data communication cable for each passive device to connect the passive device to the EIU —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-68 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-13 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations

Action Step

Action

1

Install the EIU in the same rack as the shelf and the equipment that will connect to the EIU. See Procedure 4-15 “Installing and grounding the Equipment Inventory Unit (NT0H43HA)” in Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, 323-1701-210.

2

Connect power to the EIU. See Procedure 5-11 “Connecting power to the Equipment Inventory Unit” in Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, 323-1701-210 (this document).

3

Deprovision the passive devices (currently connected to the shelf maintenance panel) that must be connected to the EIU as follows: a. In the System Manager, click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list, and double-click on the shelf connected to the passive device that you want to deprovision.

The System Manager updates the screen with data for the selected shelf. b. Click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list to return the screen to full view. c. Select the Equipment/Inventory tab. d. Double-click on the line that contains the passive device that you want to deprovision.

The 565/5100/5200 Inventory dialog box appears. e. Take note of the values in the OSID and Description fields. These values are required later in the procedure. Note: Only OMXs have the OSID field. f.

In the State area of the 565/5100/5200 Inventory dialog box, select OOS from the Administrative drop-down list.

g. Click OK to close the dialog box.

The Confirm Inventory OOS dialog box appears. h. Click Yes to confirm the change. i.

Right click on the passive device to be deleted from the inventory.

j.

Select Delete from the drop-down list.

The Confirm Inventory Delete dialog box appears. k. Click Yes to confirm the change. l. 4

Repeat substeps a. to k. for each passive device.

Disconnect and remove all data communication cables between the deprovisioned passive devices and the shelf maintenance panel. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-69 Procedure 6-13 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations Step

Action

5

Wait five minutes to allow the passive devices to be deleted from the Equipment Inventory screen. Note: At this point, the Equipment Inventory in the SMI can still display the passive devices.

6

Click the Refresh button to verify that the passive devices are no longer displayed in their respective Equipment Inventory screens.

7

Connect the Equipment Inventory Unit to the shelf maintenance panel. See Procedure 6-14 “Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel” in Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, 323-1701-210 (this document).

8

Provision EIU data as follows: a. In the System Manager, click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list, and double-click on the shelf connected to the EIU.

The System Manager updates the screen with data for the selected shelf. b. Click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list to return the screen to full view. c. Select the Equipment/Inventory tab. d. Click on the Refresh button. e. Verify that the EIU Oper state is IS-NR. f.

Right click on the EIU.

g. Select Modify from the drop-down list.

The 565/5100/5200 Inventory dialog box appears. h. If necessary, in the Description field, enter a description. i. 9

Click OK to close the dialog box.

Connect the passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit. See Procedure 6-12 “Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in new installations” in Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, 323-1701-210 (this document). —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-70 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-13 (continued) Connecting passive devices to the Equipment Inventory Unit in existing installations Step

Action

10

Provision passive device data. a. In the System Manager, click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list, and double-click on the shelf connected to the EIU.

The System Manager updates the screen with data for the selected shelf. b. Click on the Selected Shelves drop-down list to return the screen to full view. c. Select the Equipment/Inventory tab. d. Click on the Refresh button. e. Double click on the EIU. f.

Verify that the Oper state is IS-NR for all passive devices connected to the EIU.

g. Double click on the passive device.

The 565/5100/5200 Inventory dialog box appears. h. If necessary, in the OSID field, enter an OSID. Note: Only OMXs have the OSID field. i.

If necessary, in the Description field, enter a description.

j.

Click OK to close the dialog box.

k. Repeat step g. to step j. for each passive device connected to the EIU. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-71

Procedure 6-14 Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel Follow this procedure to connect the EIU to the shelf maintenance panel using the NT0H4322 cable (9.8 ft) cable or the NT0H4345 cable (5 ft) cable. The Equipment Inventory Unit (EIU) drawer allows up to 16 passive devices to be inventoried per shelf. The EIU is connected to the shelf maintenance panel, then the individual passive devices are connected to the EIU. Inside the maintenance panel of each shelf are two OMX interface (OMXI) cards that allow the System Manager to inventory and monitor the equipment. When you complete this procedure, the EIU data communications cable (NT0H4322 or the NT0H4345) will be connected between the EIU and the maintenance panel. For more information on specific equipment drawers, see Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

CAUTION The interfaces described in this procedure are intended for intrabuilding use only.

Requirements You must have completed the procedures to mount a 5100 shelf (4 U high) in a rack or cabinet, before you begin this procedure. Also, you must have completed the procedure for mounting an EIU. Refer to the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book for the required procedures. Table 6-27 lists the tools and materials required for completing this procedure. Table 6-27 Tools and materials for connecting the EIU to the maintenance panel Item

Quantity

Data communications cable (NT0H4322 cable 1 [9.8 ft] cable or NT0H4345 cable [5 ft])

Supplied

√

yes

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-72 Installing peripheral cables Procedure 6-14 (continued) Connecting the Equipment Inventory Unit to the maintenance panel

Precautions CAUTION Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

Action Step

Action

1

If the maintenance panel is not open, loosen the thumbscrews and remove the left maintenance panel cover to access the interface cards.

2

Insert one end of the data communications cable (NT0H4322 or NT0H4345) through the access slot in the left side of the maintenance panel.

3

Insert the connector in the OMXI port 1 (top) or 2 (bottom) on one of the OMXI cards in the maintenance panel. See Figure 6-22.

4

Run the cable through the vertical fiber brackets.

5

Insert the other end of the data communications cable in the port labelled “To Shelf” on the front of the EIU (see Figure 6-23 on page 6-73). —end—

Figure 6-22 Cable connection to the 5100 maintenance panel DATA

EAST

LINK

OM1037t WEST

ESD

POWER B

10BASE-T 1X

CRITICAL

TIA/EIA-232/V.24 1 (DTE) MAJOR

ACO

GND

10BASE-T 2X

MINOR

OMXI

DATA

POWER

LINK

STATUS

TIA/EIA-232/V.24 2 (DCE)

OMXI west OMXI East

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing peripheral cables 6-73 Figure 6-23 Front panel of the EIU OM3642.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

6-74 Installing peripheral cables

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-1

Installing circuit packs

7-

Use the procedures in this chapter to install 5100 circuit packs, small form factor pluggable (SFP) and large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules, or filler cards.

Security policy ATTENTION The 565/5100/5200 is capable of meeting the security requirements of Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) 140-2. One requirement in being FIPS 140-2 compliant is the application of tamper-evident seals to the shelves. For all information related to the 565/5100/5200 and the security requirements of FIPS 140-2, see Security Policy (NT0H64BA).

Before you begin Before you begin the procedures in this chapter, make sure that you have completed the necessary procedures in the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book.

Requirements All tools and materials tables include a check box for you to ensure that you have all the required materials for an installation. Table 7-1 lists the tools and materials that you require to complete all the procedures in this chapter. Table 7-1 Tools and materials required to install circuit packs Item

Quantity

Supplied

Antistatic wrist strap

1

no

√

Precautions CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure you know how to handle electronic components correctly before you begin installation procedures. Incorrect handling can cause damage to static-sensitive components. 565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-2 Installing circuit packs

CAUTION Risk of shelf malfunction

Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any 565/5100/5200 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to 565/5100/5200 equipment can cause shelf malfunction.

Handling circuit packs To avoid possible damage to circuit packs by electrostatic discharge (ESD), follow these precautions: •

Wear a grounded antistatic wrist strap connected to the ESD port, or shoe straps, when handling circuit packs. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to test ESD protection before handling circuit packs.

•

Keep circuit packs in their antistatic bags until you are ready to install them.

•

Remove circuit packs from their antistatic bags and install them directly into the unit. Do not pass circuit packs to another person.

•

If you have to put a circuit pack down, put the circuit pack back into its antistatic bag first.

•

Handle circuit packs by their edges only. Do not touch the electronic components or any exposed printed circuitry.

•

Limit your movement during installation to reduce the build-up of static electricity.

Procedure list Table 7-2 lists the procedures in this chapter. Bear in mind the ATTENTION on page 7-1 related to applying tamper-evident seals. Table 7-2 Component installation procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

7-1 Inserting circuit packs in a 5100 shelf

7-4

Required.

7-2 Installing an ETS Comms module in an ETS shelf

7-9

Required when using an ETS.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-3 Table 7-2 (Continued) Component installation procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

7-3 Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf

7-11

Required when using an ETS.

7-4 Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules

7-15

Required when using a circuit pack with pluggable modules (for example, a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s, a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack, a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack, a Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack, a Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack, Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack, an OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack, an OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack, an OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack an OTR 10G Quad, or an OTR 10G Quad with Encryption).

7-5 Inserting filler cards

7-25

Required for all empty slots in a shelf. Slot 6 requires a filler card if your configuration does not include an OSC.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-4 Installing circuit packs

Procedure 7-1 Inserting circuit packs in a 5100 shelf Follow this procedure to insert circuit packs in a 5100 shelf.

Requirements Before you begin this procedure: •

the 5100 shelf must be mounted in a rack or cabinet. Refer to the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book for the required procedures.

•

You must wear an antistatic wrist strap throughout this procedure.

•

If your network plan does not require circuit packs in all the slots, you must insert filler cards in the unused slots of the shelf.

•

You must be familiar with circuit pack slot placement rules within a shelf. Refer to “Site requirements and equipping rules”in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110, .

•

You must be familiar with circuit pack compatibility rules. Refer to “General circuit pack information” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

•

You must be aware that as of Release 6.1, a 5100 shelf can be equipped with only one database-carrying circuit pack and a Shelf Processor circuit pack. However, it is still recommended that two database-carrying circuit packs be equipped in the 5100 shelf for database redundancy purposes.

Precautions Inspect the backplane to make sure that connector pins are straight and that the backplane is free of any packaging materials or other debris. You can then insert circuit packs in the shelf according to your network configuration and protection scheme. In this procedure, you insert the circuit packs in the shelf but you do not seat them in the backplane and lock them in position.

CAUTION Release 3.2 software baseline requirement

All circuit packs installed on a 5100 shelf must meet the release 3.2 software baseline requirement. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-5 Procedure 7-1 (continued) Inserting circuit packs in a 5100 shelf

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Follow ESD safety precautions listed under “Handling circuit packs” on page 7-2 in this chapter.

Expected results When you complete this procedure •

the circuit packs are inserted but are not seated in the 5100 shelf

•

follow Procedure 7-5 to install filler cards in all the empty slots in the shelf

Action Step

Action

1

Put on an antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a ground point on the maintenance panel.

2

Remove the shelf cover by releasing the lock latches on the sides and lifting the door off its pivots. See Figure 7-1 on page 7-7.

DANGER Risk of personal injury or equipment damage

Do not let go of the shelf cover when you open it. The shelf cover is not permanently attached to the shelf. You must remove the door completely. If you let go of the door when you open it, you can cause personal injury, damage to the equipment, or both. 3

Visually inspect the backplane to make sure that connector pins are straight and that the backplane is free of any packaging materials or other debris.

4

Hold the circuit pack horizontally, so that the indicator lamps (LEDs) are to the left before you attempt to position it in the shelf. Carefully line up the circuit pack with the plastic guides in the slot opening. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-6 Installing circuit packs Procedure 7-1 (continued) Inserting circuit packs in a 5100 shelf Step

Action

5

Keep the lock latches flat against the faceplate so the circuit pack does not seat into the backplane connector. Carefully slide the circuit pack toward the back of the shelf until it stops. See Figure 7-2 on page 7-8.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage During an installation, insert the circuit packs in the shelf but do not seat them in the backplane and lock them in position.

6

Repeat step 4 and step 5 until all the circuit packs are in their correct positions in the circuit pack cage.

7

Bear in mind the ATTENTION on page 7-1 related to applying tamper-evident seals. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-7 Figure 7-1 Removing the shelf cover OM1005t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-8 Installing circuit packs Figure 7-2 Inserting circuit packs in a 5100 shelf OM1006t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-9

Procedure 7-2 Installing an ETS Comms module in an ETS shelf Use this procedure to install the Enhanced Trunk Switch communications (ETS Comms) module into the ETS shelf if an ETS shelf is already installed in the rack. The ETS consists of three components: the shelf, the comms module, and the switch module. Each item is shipped in individual boxes. For more information on the Enhanced Trunk Switch, see “Enhanced Trunk Switch” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Before you start this procedure, bear the following rules in mind: •

install the three components of the ETS in following order: — first install the ETS shelf (Procedure 4-10) — second install the ETS Comms module by using this procedure (Procedure 7-2) — third, install the ETS Switch module (Procedure 7-3)

•

in this release, you must always install the ETS Switch module in the right-most slot of the ETS shelf. For correct operation, the ETS Comms module must be installed in the left-most slot of the ETS shelf (see Figure 7-3).

Figure 7-3 Enhanced Trunk Switch Comms module OM2636p

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-10 Installing circuit packs Procedure 7-2 (continued) Installing an ETS Comms module in an ETS shelf

Figure 7-4 shows the Nylatch fastener of the ETS Switch module. Figure 7-4 Nylatch fastener of the ETS Switch module in the out position OM2706p

Nylatch

Action Step

Action

1

Remove the Enhanced Trunk Switch comms module (see Figure 7-3 on page 7-9) from its protective packaging.

2

Pull the Nylatch fasteners into the “out” position (see Figure 7-4).

3

Line the ETS Comms module up with the left-most slot of the ETS shelf.

4

With your fingers on the front panel of the ETS Comms module, push the module into the slot. Do not push on the Nylatch fasteners. It is normal to feel some resistance as the connector on the module engages the backplane connector. Note: The module is seated correctly when the front flange of the module is flush against the front flange of the ETS shelf.

5

When the ETS Comms module is seated, push forward on the Nylatch fasteners until they snap into the “in” position.

6

If the ETS shelf is powered and the ETS Comms module is seated correctly, the CARD LED lights (yellow). The CARD LED turns green after the module is initialized.

7

Press the INIT button on the ETS Comms module. Wait at least one minute for the ETS Comms module to reinitialize before continuing with another procedure. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-11

Procedure 7-3 Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf Use this procedure to install the Enhanced Trunk Switch (ETS) switch module in the ETS shelf if the ETS shelf is already installed in the rack. The ETS consists of three components: the shelf, the comms module, and the switch module. Each item is shipped in individual boxes. For more information on the Enhanced Trunk Switch, see “Enhanced Trunk Switch” in Hardware Description, 323-1701-102.

Requirements Before you start this procedure, bear the following rules in mind: •

install the three components of the ETS in following order: — first install the ETS shelf (Procedure 4-10) — second install the ETS Comms module (Procedure 7-2) — third, install the ETS Switch module by using this procedure (Procedure 7-3)

•

in this release, you must always install the ETS Switch module (see Figure 7-5) in the right-most slot of the ETS shelf. For correct operation, the ETS Comms module must be installed in the left-most slot of the ETS shelf.

Figure 7-5 ETS Switch module OM2637p

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-12 Installing circuit packs Procedure 7-3 (continued) Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf

Figure 7-6 shows the Nylatch fastener of the ETS Switch module. Figure 7-6 Nylatch fastener of the ETS Switch module in the out position OM2706p

Nylatch

Action Step

Action

1

Remove the ETS Switch module from its protective packaging (see Figure 7-5 on page 7-11).

2

Pull the Nylatch fasteners into the “out” position (see Figure 7-6).

3

Line the ETS Switch module up with the right-most slot of the ETS shelf.

4

With your fingers on the front panel of the ETS Switch module, gently push the module into the slot. Do not push on the Nylatch fasteners. It is normal to feel some resistance as the connector on the module engages the backplane connector. Note: The ETS Switch module is seated correctly when the front flange of the module is flush against the front flange of the ETS shelf.

5

When the ETS Switch module is seated, push forward on the Nylatch fasteners until they snap into the “in” position. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-13 Procedure 7-3 (continued) Installing an ETS Switch module in an ETS shelf Step

Action

6

Select the required hazard laser safety label as follows. If the ETS Switch module is used on

Then

an unamplified network

apply a hazard 3A laser safety label above the ETS Switch module

a preamplified network and the ETS Switch module is located before the preamplifier

apply a 3A safety label above the ETS Switch module

a preamplified network and the ETS Switch module is located after the preamplifier

apply a hazard laser safety label above the ETS Switch module

7

Apply the required hazard laser safety label on the ETS shelf, just above the ETS Switch module. The hazard safety labels are part of the ETS installation kit (see Figure 7-7 on page 7-14). Align the bottom of the label to the top of the ETS Switch module. Align the left end of the label with the left end of the ETS Switch module.

8

If the ETS shelf is powered and the ETS Switch module is seated correctly, you can observe the following: •

CARD and AUTO LEDs are lit (green).

•

MAJ LED is lit (red). This LED turn off after the fibers are connected and a signal is present.

•

MIN and PRI LEDs are lit (yellow). These LEDs turn off after the fibers are connected and a signal is present. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-14 Installing circuit packs Figure 7-7 Hazard laser safety label OM2648p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-15

Procedure 7-4 Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules Use this procedure to install small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules into an optical interface circuit pack. SFPs are supported on the •

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH (MOTR 20G L2 ETH) circuit pack

•

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video (MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video) circuit pack

•

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical (MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical) circuit pack

•

Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack

•

Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack

•

OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack Note: The Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack also has line-side SFPs. The OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack also has a line-side SFP.

XFPs are supported on the •

MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack

•

MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack

•

MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack

•

OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack

•

OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack

•

OTR 10G Quad (QOTR 10G)

•

OTR 10G Quad with Encryption (QOTR/E 10G)

You can perform this procedure when the circuit pack is carrying traffic on other SFP ports and on the line side ports. When you complete this procedure, the SFP and XFP modules are installed in the circuit pack, as applicable, and dust caps cover empty XFP and SFP cages. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-16 Installing circuit packs Procedure 7-4 (continued) Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules

Note 1: The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs are equipped with receptacles (cages) for two line-side XFPs. The QOTR/E 10G and QOTR 10G circuit packs are each equipped with receptacles with four XFPs. Port 1 and Port 2 are for the line side. Port 3 and Port 4 are for the client side or you can provision them for the line side. Note 2: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack does not support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT and Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT Extended Reach (ER) does support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10.

ATTENTION Ciena has conducted failure mode analysis regarding the repeated insertion and removal of small form factor pluggables (SFP) or a large form factor pluggables (XFP). Under normal operating conditions, once inserted and carrying live traffic, pluggables operate as fixed transceivers on current 565/5100/5200 circuit packs. However, if a pluggable is inserted and removed repeatedly, it is possible for the electrical contacts on pluggable or the pluggable receptacle on the circuit pack to wear out prematurely. Unnecessary or repeated insertions and removals are not considered normal and accepted operating practice, and Ciena recommends that this be avoided and that pluggable removal and insertion be performed only as normal operating practice (for example, during maintenance, card replacement and trouble clearing operations).

Requirements Before you start this procedure, you •

must wear an antistatic wrist strap

•

make sure that you have the correct type and number of SFP or XFP modules. Note: Figure 7-8, Figure 7-9, Figure 7-11 to Figure 7-14 show pluggable modules used with the Muxponder circuit pack. Figure 7-15 and Figure 7-16 show XFPs in an OTR 10G Ultra and OTR 10G FC circuit pack, respectively. Figure 7-17 show XFP pluggable modules used with the QOTR 10G and the QOTR/E 10G circuit packsFor details, refer to Chapter 13 of the Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-17 Procedure 7-4 (continued) Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules

•

make sure that you have the dust caps (Figure 7-10 on page 7-21) that are provided with the circuit pack to cover empty SFP or XFP receptacles (cages). Dust caps are recommended to prevent damage to empty SFP receptacles.

Precautions CAUTION Traffic will be lost

When you replace an SFP or XFP module, traffic will be lost during the entire duration of the procedure.

CAUTION Risk of damage to equipment

Follow the ESD safety precautions listed under “Handling circuit packs” on page 7-2 in this chapter.

CAUTION Risk of affecting traffic on adjacent SFP modules

Because of the close proximity of adjacent in-service SFP modules, there is a significant risk of mechanical interference when you add or remove SFP modules, which causes traffic errors. Do not disturb the fibers connected to the traffic-carrying SFP ports. Use the universal fiber tool, which is provided with the circuit packs, to connect and disconnect the client optical fiber patchcords to reduce the risk.

CAUTION Risk of network reliability

Make sure that all fiber connectors are cleaned before you make the connections (or reconnections) described in this chapter. For cleaning information, see Procedure 9-5, “Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing”.

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-18 Installing circuit packs Procedure 7-4 (continued) Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules

CAUTION Electrostatic discharge

Observe all antistatic precautions when handling circuit packs. Refer to “Handling circuit packs” on page 7-2.

Action Step 1

Action

CAUTION Risk of failure to autoprovision

Do not insert an SFP in the circuit pack while it is booting. Once the status LED is solid green the circuit pack is ready to receive the SFP. Otherwise, the SFP may fail to autoprovision and will require a reseat to correct. 2

Wear an antistatic wrist strap and foot straps to protect the equipment from static damage. Connect the wrist strap to an available earth point.

3

Remove the dust cap from the pluggable receptacle on the optical interface circuit pack. Store the dust cap in an appropriate location.

4

Remove the pluggable (Figure 7-8 on page 7-20) from its box.

5

Open the latch of the new pluggable module and review the related illustrations (Figure 7-11 on page 7-22 to Figure 7-14 on page 7-23) to make sure that you insert the pluggable module in the correct orientation. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-19 Procedure 7-4 (continued) Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules Step

Action

6

Slide the new pluggable module into the appropriate circuit pack receptacle making sure to orient the pluggable module as follows before insertion. If you are installing a pluggable on a

Then orient the pluggable such that the pluggable

MOTR 20G L2 ETH or MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video in a 5100

latch on the XFPs opens as indicated in Figure 7-11 on page 7-22 latch on the SFPs in ports 7, 9, 11, and 13 (which are at the bottom) opens as indicated in Figure 7-11 on page 7-22 latch on the SFPs in slots 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 (which are at the top) opens as indicated in Figure 7-11 on page 7-22

MOTR 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC in a 5100

latch on the SFP for an odd-numbered SFP receptacle opens towards the top (see Figure 7-12 on page 7-22) latch on the SFP for an even-numbered SFP receptacle opens towards the bottom

MOTR 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 in a 5100

latch opens towards the bottom of the shelf (see Figure 7-13 on page 7-23 and related note)

MOTR 2.5 Gbit/s in a 5100

latch opens towards the bottom of the shelf (see Figure 7-14 on page 7-23)

OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra or OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE in a 5100

latch opens towards the top of the shelf (see Figure 7-15 on page 7-23 and the related note) The hinge is located on the top edge of the pluggable.

OTR 4 Gbit/s FC in a 5100

latch opens towards the bottom of the shelf (see Figure 7-16 on page 7-24 and the related note)

OTR 10G Quad or latch opens towards the bottom of the OTR 10G Quad with Encryption shelf (see Figure 7-17 on page 7-24) in a 5100 —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-20 Installing circuit packs Procedure 7-4 (continued) Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules Step

Action

7

Close the pluggable latch and then completely slide the pluggable into the receptacle until it locks into place. Note 1: If the pluggable latch is not folded back before you slide the pluggable into the receptacle of the circuit pack, the pluggable can get stuck. Note 2: Figure 7-11 on page 7-22 shows how to slide the XFP module and SFP module into a MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack and a MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack. Figure 7-12 on page 7-22 shows how to slide the SFP module into the SFP receptacle of a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack. Figure 7-14 on page 7-23 shows how to slide the SFP module into the SFP receptacle of a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack (OTR 4 Gbit/s FC and Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit packs are similar). Figure 7-17 on page 7-24 shows how to slide the XFP module into the XFP receptacle of a OTR 10G Quad with Encryption circuit pack.

8

Remove the protective connector caps.

9

Clean the fiber connector and the SFP or XFP adapter housings. See Procedure 9-1, “Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex)” and Procedure 9-5, “Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing” in this document.

10

Connect the fibers to the SFP or XFP module using the procedures in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221. —end—

Figure 7-8 SFP module (photo) OM3665.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-21 Figure 7-9 SFP module OM2913p

Note: The XFP module is larger than the SFP module. Figure 7-10 Dust caps for XFP and SFP ports OM3299.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-22 Installing circuit packs Figure 7-11 Installing pluggable modules into a MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack OM3369.jpg

Figure 7-12 Installing an SFP module into a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack OM3611.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-23 Figure 7-13 Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack OM33371.jpg

Note: Figure 7-13 shows the latches on the pluggables in the closed position. When you insert the pluggable, the latch is open (towards the bottom of the shelf) as in Figure 7-14. Figure 7-14 Installing an SFP module into a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack OM2923t

Figure 7-15 OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack OM3370.jpg

Note: Figure 7-15 shows the latch on the pluggable in the closed position. When you insert the pluggable, the latch is open (towards the top of the shelf) as in Figure 7-12 on page 7-22. (The hinge is on the top edge of the pluggable.)

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-24 Installing circuit packs Figure 7-16 OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack OM3086p.jpg(R)

Note: Figure 7-16 shows the latches on the pluggables in the closed position. When you insert the pluggable, the latch is open (towards the bottom of the shelf) as in Figure 7-14 on page 7-23. Figure 7-17 Installing an XFP into a OTR 10G Quad with Encryption circuit pack OM3473,jg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-25

Procedure 7-5 Inserting filler cards Follow this procedure to insert and seat LC, OCLD, blank filler cards (see Figure 7-18 on page 7-27) or a filler card with a straight faceplate (Figure 7-19 on page 7-27) in all unused slots in a 5100 shelf.

OCLD filler cards OCLD filler cards (NT0H52BA) have FC connectors on the faceplate. The OCLD filler card is used if you want to pre-fiber any OMX variant other than the OMX (Standard) tray. Note: Pre-fibering is an optional exercise. It is not mandatory. Connect the patchcords from the OMX tray to the FC connectors on the corresponding OCLD filler card to protect the fibers and the connectors. This also ensures that the patchcords are routed to the correct location in the event that you have to install a new circuit pack quickly.

LC filler cards LC filler cards (NT0H52DA) have LC connectors on the faceplate. The LC filler card is used if you want to pre-fiber any OMX variant other than the OMX (Standard) tray. Note: Pre-fibering is an optional exercise. It is not mandatory. Connect the patchcords from the OMX tray to the LC connectors on the corresponding LC filler card to protect the fibers and the connectors. This also ensures that the patchcords are routed to the correct location in the event that you have to install a new circuit pack quickly.

Blank filler cards Blank filler cards (NT0H52AA) have no connectors, and are installed in all other unused slots.

Filler cards with straight faceplate Release 11.0 introduced the Filler card with straight faceplate (NT0H52ABE6) (see Figure 7-19 on page 7-27).

Requirements Before you begin this procedure, the 5100 shelf must be mounted in a rack. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-26 Installing circuit packs Procedure 7-5 (continued) Inserting filler cards

You must wear an antistatic wrist strap throughout this procedure.

ATTENTION You must use filler cards in slots that do not have active circuit packs. Filler cards protect the connectors on the backplane from dust and debris, and improve the efficiency of cooling the shelf.

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

Do not stare into beam or view directly with optical instruments. 565/5100/5200 is a Class 3A laser product.

Expected results When you complete this procedure the blank filler cards are inserted and seated in the 5100 shelf.

Action Step

Action

1

Identify all unused circuit pack slots and make sure that you have enough blank filler cards for the slots.

2

Carefully line up the left and right of the card with the plastic guides in the slot opening and carefully slide the card into position.

3

Push the ends of the lock latches against the faceplate of the blank filler card to lock the card in place.

4

Repeat step 2 and step 3 until all the blank filler cards are locked in the shelf.

5

Replace the shelf cover.

6

Bear in mind the ATTENTION on page 7-1 related to applying tamper-evident seals. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Installing circuit packs 7-27 Figure 7-18 OCLD, OFA, and blank filler cards

OFA filler card OCLD filler card

CAUTION

RX

TX

Invisible Laser Radiation Avoid Exposure To Beam

IN

OUT

OFA FLR

FLR

C-BAND

Blank filler cards

OM0308p

Figure 7-19 Filler card with straight faceplate OM3684.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

7-28 Installing circuit packs

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-1

Fiber management

8-

Use the procedures in this chapter to manage fibers for 5100 components and equipment.

Before you begin It is important to clean all the fibers and optical connectors before you install them and make connections. For cleaning procedures, see Chapter 9 “Cleaning connectors”. It is also important that you accurately label all the fibers as you install them and make the connections to your equipment. Troubleshooting, maintenance, and upgrade tasks will be simplified if all connections are clearly understood before undertaking any of these activities. For labeling information, see Procedure 8-1. When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-2 Fiber management

Before you begin the procedures in this chapter, make sure that you have completed the necessary procedures in the “Installing 5100 shelves and equipment” chapter of this book.

Requirements All tools and materials tables include a check box for you to ensure that you have all the required materials for an installation. Table 8-1 lists the tools and materials that you require to complete all the procedures in this chapter. Table 8-1 Tools and materials required to manage fiber Item

Quantity

Supplied

Fiber termination labels

as required

no

Curly locks or Velcro cable ties

as required

no for most equipment

√

yes with the OMX 16CH DWDM installation kit

Precautions CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure you know how to handle electronic components correctly before you begin installation procedures. Incorrect handling can cause damage to static-sensitive components.

CAUTION Risk of shelf malfunction

Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any 565/5100/5200 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to 565/5100/5200 equipment can cause shelf malfunction.

Handling optical fibers When you work with optical fibers, you must take these precautions: •

Wear safety glasses when you install optical fibers.

•

Never look into an active optical fiber or the optical fiber connector opening of an active or powered-up unit.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-3

•

Prevent direct exposure to optical fiber ends or optical connector ends where you can directly access the laser signal.

DANGER Risk of eye injury

If you have a piece of a glass in your eye, get medical assistance immediately. •

Wear rubber gloves when you clean optical connectors. The gloves prevent direct contact with the isopropyl alcohol and prevent contamination of the ferrules with skin oils.

•

Place all optical fiber clippings in a plastic container provided for that purpose.

•

Handle optical fibers with caution. Place the optical fibers in a safe location during installation.

•

Protect all optical fiber connectors with clean dust caps at all times.

•

Follow the manufacturer instructions when you use an optical test set. Incorrect calibration or control settings can create hazardous levels of radiation.

Splicing optical fibers When you must look at a spliced optical fiber with a small magnifier, take the following precautions: •

Power off all laser sources to the optical fiber or disconnect the remote optical fiber end from the laser sources before you start splicing. Make sure that all laser sources remain disconnected or powered off. The sources can be in a central office, on a subscriber premises, or in a remote location.

•

Disconnect all optical test sets from the optical fiber before you start splicing. The connections can be local or remote.

•

Use only the optical instruments approved by your company.

Repairing optical fibers When an accidental break occurs in the optical fiber, do the following: •

Report the location of the damaged optical fiber to both the central-office and field-repair personnel.

•

Power off all laser sources to the optical fiber or disconnect the remote optical fiber end from the laser sources. The sources can be in a central office, subscriber premises, or a remote location.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-4 Fiber management

Procedure list Table 8-2 lists the procedures in this chapter. Table 8-2 Fiber management procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

8-1 Labeling cables and optical fibers

8-6

Required.

8-2 Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager

8-10

Required.

8-3 Guidelines for routing fiber in a drawer equipped with tray assemblies

8-15

Required.

8-4 Routing fibers for optical circuit packs

8-20

Required.

8-5 Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack

8-23

Required if the 5100 network includes a Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack, Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH+Video circuit pack, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack, or a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack

8-6 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM

8-35

Required if the 5100 network includes a single-band OMX.

8-6 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz

8-40

Required if the 5100 network includes a OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH Enhanced, or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz.

8-8 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM

8-46

Required if the 5100 network includes an OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM.

8-9 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps

8-52

Required if the 5100 network has a quad-band OMX.

8-10 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM 8-60 or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM

Required if the 5100 network has a 4-CH ITU CWDM OMX or 8-CH ITU CWDM OMX.

8-11 Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or 8-71 OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

Required if the 5100 network has an OMX 16CH DWDM or an OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-5 Table 8-2 (Continued) Fiber management procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

8-12 Routing fibers for the OSC tray

8-77

Required if you install an OSC at the site.

8-13 Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps

8-80

Required if you install an OSC tray with dual taps at the site.

8-14 Installing a 90-degree bootclip to a patch cord boot (for Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel, only)

8-84

Required if you install Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel, (TPT-10) NT0H59AC, at the site.

8-15 Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray

8-86

Required if you install Transponder Protection Tray at the site.

8-16 Routing fibers for the patch panel

8-93

Required if you install a patch panel at the site.

8-17 Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler

8-104

Required if you install a 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler at the site.

8-18 Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA

8-108

Required if you install a Discrete VOA at the site.

8-19 Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer

8-112

Required if you install a DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer.

8-20 Routing fibers for the Optical Trunk Switch

8-118

Required if you install an OTS at the site

8-21 Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch

8-120

Required if you install an ETS at the site

Note: You must perform Procedure 8-14 on page 8-84 before you route fibers for a Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel (TPT-10), NT0H59AC.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

√

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-6 Fiber management

Procedure 8-1 Labeling cables and optical fibers Use this procedure to apply labels to both ends of all cables and optical fibers as shown in Figure 8-1. To label cables and fibers, use Panduit labels printed through Microsoft Excel. Panduit labels are provided on a standard 8.5x11 letter size sheet. Each sheet contains 49 labels. The label template use printing information pre-configured for the Panduit label sheet and should not need adjustment. If required, minor cell formatting can be conducted for proper alignment. Figure 8-1 Label application diagram DX0428

Labels applied here

Cautions •

Apply labels approximately 3 in. to 6 in. (or 75 mm to 150 mm) from the fiber boot.

•

Labels should be applied to the patch cord in a fashion that does not create micro bends.

Requirements •

Make sure you have installed all fibers. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-7 Procedure 8-1 (continued) Labeling cables and optical fibers

Table 8-3 lists the tools and materials that you require to complete this procedure. Table 8-3 Tools and materials required to label cables and optical fibers Item

Quantity

Supplied

If using the Panduit label method, a PC (or laptop) 1 with Microsoft Excel running the installation fiber labeling template

no

If using the Panduit label method, InkJet quality printer (or better)

1

no

Fiber termination labels

as required

no

√

Expected results You have marked with labels all the fibers that connect to the 5100 network element.

Action Step

Action

1

Enter the appropriate information into the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. Information is inserted into the appropriate cells, and will be printed in the corresponding label (see Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3 on page 8-8). Note: Only labels 1 to 14 are shown in the following illustration. There are 49 labels per sheet.

Figure 8-2 Identification areas on a label DX0429

Customer's designation (as required)

XXXXXXX

White vinyl designation area

Transparent "Mylar" area

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-8 Fiber management Procedure 8-1 (continued) Labeling cables and optical fibers Step

Action

Figure 8-3 Panduit label spreadsheet OM3694 Origin atio n Label 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

2

Rack

Shelf

Termin atio n Slo t / Port

Rack

Shelf

Slot / Port

Print the Panduit labels. See Figure 8-4 for examples of Panduit labels.

Figure 8-4 Panduit fiber labels (example) OM3695

To : 10 0.01 100 0.01 (TX )

Sh 1

To: 100.02 10 00.02 (TX )

Sh 2

To: 100 .03 1000 .03 (TX )

Sh 3

Fr: 20 0.01 200 0.01 (RX )

Sh 1

Fr: 20 0.02 20 00.02 (RX )

Sh 2

Fr: 20 0.03 2000 .03 (RX )

Sh 3

3

Place the adhesive side of the label underneath the cable at a right angle. The cable should lie along the boundary between the white portion and the clear portion of the label, ensuring the “To” and “From” information is oriented toward the end of the fiber boot.

4

Fold the transparent portion of the label over the patch cord and press firmly against the white side of the label. Ensure the label is completely sealed (see Figure 8-5 on page 8-9).

5

Repeat step 3 and step 4 for the opposite end of the cable. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-9 Procedure 8-1 (continued) Labeling cables and optical fibers Step

Action

Figure 8-5 Wrap the label around the cable of optical fiber DX0430

Wrap

xxx

xxx

x

Clear area 6

Repeat this procedure for all other cables and optical fibers. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-10 Fiber management

Procedure 8-2 Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager Follow these guidelines when you are routing slack fiber through the Fiber Manager.

Precautions CAUTION Risk of insufficient fiber slack

Be sure the Fiber Manager, and the drawer from which the fiber is being routed, are fully open before you begin to route the fiber around the Fiber Manager spools. You must leave sufficient slack in the fiber so that you can open the drawers without stretching the fiber.

CAUTION Risk of fiber damage

Each Fiber Manager can manage a maximum of 16 fibers. Each fiber spool in the drawer can manage 1.6 meters of fiber (maximum 3-mm diameter). Do not stretch the fiber, or wrap the fiber on the spools too tightly, or you risk damaging the fiber. Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers entering and exiting the Fiber Manager.

CAUTION Risk of affecting network reliability

Fiber connectors should always be cleaned prior to making connections to ensure network reliability.

ATTENTION The Fiber Manager has two sliding fiber management components located on the left and right sides of the drawer. Each of these components has two tabs that lock into position across the top of the dish, to hold the routed fibers in position. To open the tab to route fiber through the dish, press the tab toward the back of the latch while you lift the tab. Press down on the tab to close it. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-11 Procedure 8-2 (continued) Guidelines for routing fiber in the Fiber Manager

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do so could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened.

Guidelines for routing fiber Guideline Detail 1

Make sure every fiber is labeled.

2

Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber.

3

Fibers coming into the Fiber Manager from the left side should be routed around the spools on the left side of the drawer. Fibers coming into the Fiber Manager from the right side should be routed around the spools on the right side of the drawer. Note: Ciena recommends that fibers enter and exit the Fiber Manager on the same side.

4

Route the fiber on the spools in the following order: 1 front spools ->bottom to top 2 rear spools ->bottom to top

5

Label each flip-up spool in the Fiber Manager.

6

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers entering and exiting the Fiber Manager.

Figure 8-6 on page 8-12 illustrates how to route slack fiber around the spools in the Fiber Manager. Figure 8-7 on page 8-13 illustrates how bundle the fibers using curly locks. Figure 8-8 on page 8-14 illustrates how to bundle the fibers using Velcro cables ties. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-12 Fiber management Figure 8-6 Routing slack fiber on spools in the Fiber Manager OM1803p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-13 Figure 8-7 Bundling fibers entering and exiting the Fiber Manager (NT0H57BB) using curly locks OM2356p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-14 Fiber management Figure 8-8 Bundling fibers entering and exiting the Fiber Manager (NT0H57BB) using Velcro cable ties OM2357p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-15

Procedure 8-3 Guidelines for routing fiber in a drawer equipped with tray assemblies Follow these guidelines when you are routing fibers in and out of a drawer equipped with tray assemblies (such as OMX, OSC tray, OSC splitter/coupler tray with dual taps, C&L splitter/coupler, ECT, PBE, Transponder Protection Tray, Patch Panel, 1310 nm splitter/coupler and Discrete VOA). This procedure also provides guidelines to bundle fiber around bend radius limiters inside a drawer equipped with these tray assemblies. Note: The 10-channel Transponder Protection Tray (NT0H59AC) and the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) or the OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA) are each designed with a hinged door that you open to access ports (not a tray that you pull out). Fiber clips are provided to manage the fiber entering and exiting the component. For fiber routing instructions, refer to “Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray” on page 8-86 and “Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM” on page 8-60.

Precautions CAUTION Risk of insufficient fiber slack

Make sure that the drawer from which the fiber is being routed is fully open before you begin to route the fiber around the fiber bend radius limiters. You must leave sufficient slack in the fiber so that you can open the drawers without stretching the fiber.

CAUTION Risk of fiber damage

Do not stretch the fiber, or wrap the fiber on the fiber bend radius limiters too tightly, or you risk damaging the fiber. Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fibers entering and exiting a drawer. Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers around the bend radius limiters inside a drawer equipped with tray assemblies. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-16 Fiber management Procedure 8-3 (continued) Guidelines for routing fiber in a drawer equipped with tray assemblies

CAUTION Risk of affecting network reliability

Fiber connectors should always be cleaned prior to making connections to ensure network reliability.

CAUTION Risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do so could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-17 Procedure 8-3 (continued) Guidelines for routing fiber in a drawer equipped with tray assemblies

Guidelines for routing fiber Guideline Detail 1

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. If the equipment drawer has either a beige non-spring-loaded locking clip or a red spring-loaded locking clip, follow the instructions on page 8-51. Then continue with the guidelines on this page (page 8-17).

2

Make sure that every fiber is labeled.

3

Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right side or the left side of the drawer. To determine on which side you have to route the fibers entering or exiting the tray, refer to the appropriate routing procedure in this chapter. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

4

Fibers coming into the drawer from the left side should be routed around the bend radius limiters on the left side of the drawer. Fibers coming into the drawer from the right side should be routed around the bend radius limiters on the right side of the drawer. Route the fiber inside the drawer according to the appropriate procedure in this chapter. Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2-mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Always use the fiber bend radius limiters to coil excess fiber slack.

5

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers routed around the fiber bend radius limiters to avoid loose fibers inside a drawer. Procedure 8-16 on page 8-93 illustrates how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters in a drawer equipped with tray assemblies using curly locks. Figure 8-10 on page 8-19 illustrates how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters in a drawer equipped with tray assemblies using Velcro cables ties.

6

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers entering and exiting the drawer. See Figure 8-7 on page 8-13 and Figure 8-8 on page 8-14. Figure 8-7 on page 8-13 illustrates how to bundle the fibers exiting and entering a drawer using curly locks. Figure 8-8 on page 8-14 illustrates how to bundle the fibers exiting and entering a drawer using Velcro cable ties. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-18 Fiber management Figure 8-9 Bundling fibers in a drawer (equipped with tray assemblies) using curly locks OM2358p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-19 Figure 8-10 Bundling fibers in a drawer (equipped with tray assemblies) using Velcro cables ties OM2359p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-20 Fiber management

Procedure 8-4 Routing fibers for optical circuit packs Follow this procedure to route the fibers for optical circuit packs in a 5100 shelf. Note: If you are routing fibers to a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack, use Procedure 8-5. For other circuit packs, follow Procedure 8-4.

Requirements Circuit packs must be inserted, but not seated while routing fiber. When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

Do not stare into beam or view directly with optical instruments. Class 3A laser product.

CAUTION Clean connectors to avoid system degradation

When connecting fibers and components, clean every connector inside and outside each circuit pack and module to avoid system degradation.

CAUTION Observe minimum bend radius

Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing optical fiber.

CAUTION Label all patch cords clearly

Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct wavelength band and function (Add or Drop) information. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-21 Procedure 8-4 (continued) Routing fibers for optical circuit packs

Fiber routing guidelines for the circuit packs Guideline Detail 1

Begin with the right port on a circuit pack, and make your optical fiber connections from right to left.

2

Route the patch cords for each circuit pack through the corresponding slot to the right, on the vertical fiber rail in the card cage.

3

Use the semi-circular fiber guide on top to route fiber for circuit packs in slots 4, 5, and 6.

4

Use the semi-circular fiber guide on the bottom to route fiber for circuit packs in slots 1, 2, and 3.

5

Route all optical fiber through the large, insulated slot on the right side of the shelf.

6

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the shelf. —end—

Figure 8-11 Fiber guide detail for the 5100 shelf OM1225

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-22 Fiber management Figure 8-12 Circuit pack fiber routing for a 5100 OM1379t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-23

Procedure 8-5 Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack Follow this procedure to route fiber-optic cables for a Muxponder circuit pack in a 5100 shelf. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack is not used in the 5100 shelf.

Precautions Circuit packs must be inserted but not seated during fiber routing. Do not connect fibers to circuit packs at this time. In this procedure you route fibers to the circuit pack. (For information on connecting fiber to circuit packs, see Connections Procedures, 323-1701-221). When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.

DANGER Risk of personal injury

When inserted in a shelf slot, the optical interface circuit pack emits laser light that can blind. Keep all optical connectors on the optical interface circuit packs capped when they are not connected to fiber-optic cables. Never look directly into the end of a fiber-optic cable.

DANGER Risk of laser radiation exposure

Do not stare into the beam or view directly with optical instruments. The invisible laser radiation can cause personal injury. 5100 is a Class 3A laser product. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-24 Fiber management Procedure 8-5 (continued) Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack

CAUTION Risk of damage to equipment

Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing optical fiber. Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

CAUTION Risk of damage to equipment

Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct wavelength band and function (Add or Drop) information. Otherwise, you can cause damage to equipment during and after maintenance.

Requirements Before you start this procedure, you must make sure that •

all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 9, “Cleaning connectors”)

•

all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 8-1)

Expected results All optical fibers (line side and client side) are routed up to the large, insulated slot on the right side of the 5100 shelf, and are ready for connection to the Muxponder circuit pack. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.

Fiber routing guidelines for the circuit packs Guideline Detail 1

Manage fibers correctly, particularly when all the SFP ports of the Muxponder circuit pack are used. Follow step 1 to step 4 to route the fibers from the Muxponder circuit pack to the vertical fiber rail in the card cage.

2

Use the semi-circular fiber guide on the bottom to route the fiber for circuit packs into slots 1, 2, and 3 (which are the only available slots for the Muxponder circuit pack). See Figure 8-13 on page 8-30 and Figure 8-14 on page 8-31.

3

Route all optical fiber through the large, insulated slot on the right side of the shelf. See Figure 8-14 on page 8-31.

4

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers that exit the shelf. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-25 Procedure 8-5 (continued) Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack Step

Action

Routing client-side fibers between the vertical fiber rail and the SFP ports on the circuit pack 1

Manage fibers correctly, particularly when all the SFP ports of the Muxponder circuit pack are used. Bear the following guidelines in mind when you route fiber: •

Leave some fiber slack in the vertical fiber rail of the 5100 shelf to facilitate future installation and maintenance procedures. Fiber slack can facilitate future disconnection of fiber from a single SFP port. Without fiber slack, the user may have to disconnect the fibers of neighboring SFP ports on the Muxponder circuit pack to access a single SFP port (thereby possibly affecting traffic).

•

Use only thin, short pieces of Velcro to organize the fiber bundles that enter the exit aperture. This fiber bundling method prevents fiber pinching by the shelf cover. Thin, short pieces of Velcro do not interfere with the shelf front cover.

•

Achieve the correct bend radius when you are routing fibers for — SFP ports 9 or 10 (at the right of the faceplate when the circuit pack is horizontal). Make sure that the fibers in the fiber bundle are as close as possible to the shelf front cover. — SFP ports 11 to 14 (at the right of the faceplate when the circuit pack is horizontal) of the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack or the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack. Make sure that the fibers in the fiber bundle are as close as possible to the shelf front cover.

Note 1: The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack is equipped with 14 ports. Ports 1 and 2 are line ports. Ports 3 to 14 are client ports. The 12 client ports are for 12 bidirectional Ethernet signals (for a total of 24 clients). Note 2: The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack is equipped with 14 ports. Ports 1 and 2 are line ports. Ports 3 to 14 are client ports. The 12 client ports are for 4 bidirectional Ethernet signals (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional video (8 clients), for a total of 16 client signals. Note 3: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack does not support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT or Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT Extended Reach (ER) circuit pack do support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. Note 4: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack is equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port. Note 5: The Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s is equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port, which can also be provisioned as a client port. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-26 Fiber management Procedure 8-5 (continued) Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack Step

Action

2

Route the fibers from the vertical fiber rail of the shelf to the SFP port of the Muxponder circuit pack. If the SFP port where the duplex LC Then make sure that you route the connectors are to be connected is duplex fiber through the on the top side of the faceplate (ports 3 to 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14) of the

top exit aperture of the fiber trough under the Muxponder in question

• Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack or • Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack on the bottom side of the faceplate bottom exit aperture of the fiber (ports 7, 9, 11, and 13) of the trough, under the Muxponder circuit pack in question • the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack or • Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack the top side of the faceplate when the circuit pack is horizontal (even-numbered SFP port)

top exit aperture of the vertical fiber rail, right beside the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack

the bottom side of the faceplate when the circuit pack is horizontal (odd-numbered SPF port)

bottom exit aperture of the vertical fiber rail, right beside the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack

a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 in a 5100

top exit aperture of the fiber trough, right beside the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack

a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s in a 5100

top or bottom exit aperture of the vertical fiber rail, under the Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-27 Procedure 8-5 (continued) Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack Step

Action Note 1: Figure 8-14 on page 8-31 to Figure 8-19 on page 8-34 show fibers connected to the line-side and client-side pluggable modules. Do not seat the Muxponder circuit pack into the shelf or connect the fiber patch cord now. For connection procedures, see “Connecting components” in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221. Note 2: Figure 8-15 on page 8-32 shows 12 SFP ports of a Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack. (The SFP ports of the Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack look the same.) Note 3: Figure 8-16 on page 8-33 and Figure 8-17 on page 8-33 show 10 SFP ports of a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack. Bear in mind that the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack does not support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10.) The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack and Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT Extended Reach (ER) circuit pack do support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. Note 4: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack is equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port. Note 5: The Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack is equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port, which can also be provisioned as a client port. Figure 8-16 on page 8-33 and Figure 8-17 on page 8-33 also show the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC inserted in the shelf and the fibers connected to the SFP modules and to the line ports. Figure 8-18 on page 8-33 also shows the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 inserted in the shelf and the fibers connected to the SFP modules and to the line ports. Figure 8-19 on page 8-34 show the Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack inserted into the shelf and the fibers connected to the SFP modules and to the line ports. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-28 Fiber management Procedure 8-5 (continued) Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack Step

Action

Routing line-side fibers between the vertical fiber rail and the circuit pack 3

Manage fibers correctly, particularly when all the SFP ports of the Muxponder circuit pack are used. Bear the following guidelines in mind before routing fiber: •

Rotate slightly the 45-degree boot on the line-side fiber LC connector so that the duplex LC fibers are oriented on the left of the circuit pack faceplate. This positioning will facilitate the line-side fiber segregation from the client-side fibers.

•

Segregate the line-side fiber as much as possible from the client-side fibers. Route the line-side fiber from the left-most position on the faceplate down the front of the faceplate (when the circuit pack is horizontal), and through the bottom aperture of the fiber rail. For the Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs, route the line-side fibers down the front of the faceplate (when the circuit pack is horizontal), and through the bottom aperture.

•

Leave some fiber slack in the vertical fiber brackets of the 5100 shelf to facilitate future installation and maintenance procedures. Fiber slack can facilitate future disconnection of fiber from a single SFP port. Without fiber slack, the user may have to disconnect the fibers of neighboring SFP ports on the Muxponder circuit pack to access a single SFP port (thereby possibly affecting traffic).

•

Use only thin, short pieces of Velcro to organize the fiber bundles that enter the exit aperture. This fiber bundling method prevents fiber pinching by the shelf cover. Thin, short pieces of Velcro do not interfere with the shelf front cover. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-29 Procedure 8-5 (continued) Routing fibers for a Muxponder circuit pack Step

Action

4

Route the fibers from the vertical fiber rail of the shelf to the line port on the Muxponder circuit pack (see Figure 8-16 on page 8-33 to Figure 8-19 on page 8-34). Note 1: The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs are equipped with two line-side ports. Note 2: Figure 8-16 on page 8-33 and Figure 8-17 on page 8-33 show the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack installed in the shelf and the fibers connected to the SFP and to the line ports. Figure 8-18 on page 8-33 show the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack installed in the shelf and the fibers connected to the SFP and to the line ports. Figure 8-19 on page 8-34 show the Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack inserted into the shelf and the fibers connected to the SFP modules and to the line ports. Note 3: Do not seat any type of Muxponder circuit pack into the shelf or connect the fiber patch cords to the pluggable modules now. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221 Note 4: Figure 8-16 on page 8-33 and Figure 8-17 on page 8-33 show 10 SFP ports. Bear in mind that the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack does not support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack and Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT Extended Reach (ER) do support traffic or SFP modules in ports 9 and 10. Note 5: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack is equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port. Note 6: The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack is equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port. Note 7: The Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack is equipped with five ports. Ports 1 to 4 are client ports; port 5 is a line port, which can also be provisioned as a client port. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-30 Fiber management Figure 8-13 Fiber guide detail for a 5100 shelf OM1225t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-31 Figure 8-14 Circuit pack fiber routing for a 5100 OM1379t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-32 Fiber management Figure 8-15 Routing fibers through the shelf vertical fiber rail (two views of front)—Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack (dual slot) OM3686.jpg

Note: Route fiber for the MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack as shown in Figure 8-15 on page 8-32.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-33 Figure 8-16 Routing fibers through the shelf vertical fiber rail (front view)—Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack (dual slot) OM2616p

Figure 8-17 Routing fibers through the shelf vertical fiber rail (side view)—Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack (dual slot) OM2618p

Figure 8-18 Routing fibers through the shelf vertical fiber rail (side view)—Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit pack (dual slot) OM3084p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-34 Fiber management Figure 8-19 Routing fibers through the shelf vertical fiber rail (side view)—Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack (single slot) OM3088p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-35

Procedure 8-6 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM Follow this procedure to route optical fiber patch cords within the OMX 1CH CWDM.

Requirements Complete the procedures to mount a 5100 shelf and the OMX 1CH CWDM drawer in a rack before you begin this procedure. When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. See “CWDM OMX” on page 16-16 in the “OMX modules” chapter of Hardware Description, 323-1701-102, for a complete description of the OMX 1CH CWDM. Use SC-FC patch cords (NT0H4346) to make OMX-OCLD connections. Use SC-SC patch cords (NT0H4330) to connect east and west OMX modules at a site with one OMX where cross-over connections are required.

ATTENTION Optical patch cords that connect to circuit packs must be routed through the right-hand side of the OMX 1CH CWDM drawer.

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that all connectors are adequately cleaned before you make the connections described in this procedure. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-36 Fiber management Procedure 8-6 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM

CAUTION Clean connectors to avoid system degradation

When connecting fibers and components, clean every connector inside and outside each circuit pack and module to avoid system degradation.

CAUTION Observe minimum bend radius

Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing optical fiber.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

To avoid damaging fiber optic patch cords, ensure that you push individual bulkhead connector devices back into place before you close the OMX 1CH CWDM drawer.

CAUTION Label all patch cords clearly

Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct wavelength band and function (Add or Drop) information.

Action Step

Action

Routing patch cords for OCLD connections 1

See Procedure 1-3, “Accessing connectors in an OMX 1CH CWDM” in Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221 for information on accessing the drawer and the bulkhead connectors.

2

In the east or west OMX module, remove the dust caps from the Band Add/Band Drop connectors. Remove the dust caps from the patch cords that you intend to connect.

3

Insert the SC connector of an SC/FC patch cord into the Band Add connector in the top part of the Band Add/Band Drop connector unit. Insert the SC connector of another SC/FC patch cord into the Band Drop connector in the bottom part of the unit. See Figure 8-21 on page 8-38. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-37 Procedure 8-6 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH CWDM Step

Action

4

Route the patch cords to the right, as shown in Figure 8-20. Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the drawer.

5

Repeat step 2 to step 4 for the OMX Band Add/Band Drop connector unit in the opposite direction, if required. See Figure 8-20 for fiber routing.

Patch cord routing for OCLD connections is complete. If you require optical passthrough at the site with one OMX drawer, go to step 6. Routing patch cords for cross-over connections between east and west at a site with one OMX 6

For optical passthrough, use two SC-SC patch cords and connect one end of each cable to the THRU IN/THRU OUT connector unit in the west OMX. See Figure 8-21 on page 8-38 to view the connector labels.

7

Route the fiber to the east OMX, as shown in Figure 8-23 on page 8-39.

8

Connect the patch cord originating at the west THRU IN to the east THRU OUT. Connect the patch cord originating at the west THRU OUT to the east THRU IN. See Figure 8-22 on page 8-39 to view the required connections.

Cross-over connections are complete. —end—

Figure 8-20 OCLD patch cord routing in a OMX 1CH CWDM OM1065p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-38 Fiber management Figure 8-21 Connector labels in a OMX 1CH CWDM OM0898t

Rear (External connections) B O OTS T OU THR T U T OU BAN T O OTS DRO D B P P O THR IN U T BAN IN D T ADD O P

OTS IN OTS OU T

THR U IN THR U OU T

BAN D ADD BAN DRO D P

T O P

B O T

Front (Filter connections)

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-39 Figure 8-22 East and west cross-over connections OM1063p

WEST OMX

EAST OMX

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND DROP

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND DROP

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND ADD

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND ADD

From east Tx

To east Rx

From west Tx To west Rx

Figure 8-23 Cross-over connections in a OMX 1CH CWDM OM0968p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-40 Fiber management

Procedure 8-7 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers from the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH Enhanced tray, or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz through the fiber management trough below the card cage. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any equipment drawers. Failure to do so can cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the equipment drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the equipment drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the equipment drawer is opened. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-41 Procedure 8-7 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz

Requirements •

The OMX cable (Ethernet cable) has been installed

•

Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 9 “Cleaning connectors”)

•

Make sure all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 8-1)

When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager, OMX 4CH Enhanced tray, or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the Connecting components chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.

Action Step

Action

1

Open the tray by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the equipment drawer and pull the equipment drawer toward you until it is fully open.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Incorrect handling can result in damage to the optical fibers. 2

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer has a Then beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-26 on page 8-44) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 3.

red spring-loaded locking clip no action is required. or no locking clip Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip (Figure 8-27 on page 8-45) automatically clicks into place to keep the equipment drawer open. Go to step 3. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-42 Fiber management Procedure 8-7 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz Step

Action

3

If this OMX connects to circuit packs in slots 1-8, route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the left side (see Figure 8-24 on page 8-43). If this OMX connects to circuit packs in slots 11-18, route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right side (see Figure 8-25 on page 8-44). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties.

4

Repeat step 1 and step 3 for the other OMX (if applicable).

5

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf.

6

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any equipment drawers. Failure to do so can cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the equipment drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the equipment drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the equipment drawer is opened. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-43 Procedure 8-7 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz Step

Action

7

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

8

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. —end—

Figure 8-24 OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz optical fiber routing (left side)

T O P

BAND TX

OTS IN

THRU IN

CH 1 ADD

CH 3 ADD

CH 5 ADD

CH 7 ADD

B O T

BAND RX

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

CH 1 DROP

CH 3 DROP

CH 5 DROP

CH 7 DROP

BAND RX

CH 7 ADD

CH 4 ADD

CH 7 DROP

CH 5 ADD

CH 3 ADD

CH 5 DROP

CH 3 ADD

CH 4 DROP

CH 3 DROP

CH 1 ADD

CH 2 ADD

CH 1 DROP

THRU IN

CH 3 DROP

THRU OUT

OTS IN

CH 1 ADD

OTS OUT

BAND ADD

CH 2 DROP

BAND DROP

BAND TX

B O T T O P

CH 1 DROP

OM0515p

CAUTION INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-44 Fiber management Figure 8-25 OMX 4CH + Fiber Manager or OMX 4CH Enhanced tray or OMX 4CH DWDM 100 GHz optical fiber routing (right side) OM2911t

Figure 8-26 Locking a non-spring-loaded locking clip on an equipment drawer (sample) OM2883t

Note 1: For an equipment drawer with a beige non-spring-loaded locking clip, you must lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Note 2: Before you close the equipment drawer, you must return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-45 Figure 8-27 Unlocking a spring-loaded locking clip on an equipment drawer (sample) OM2825t

Note 1: For an equipment drawer with a red spring-loaded locking clip, no action is required when you open the equipment drawer. The red spring-loaded locking clip (Figure 8-27 on page 8-45) automatically clicks into place to keep the equipment drawer open. Note 2: Before you close the equipment drawer, you must push the red spring-loaded locking clip down.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-46 Fiber management

Procedure 8-8 Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34AA-HA in single tray or dual tray drawer assemblies) or OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34JA/KA). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do so could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-47 Procedure 8-8 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM

Requirements •

Make sure that the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34AA-HA in single tray or dual tray assembly) or OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34JA/KA) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-12 on page 4-65.

•

Make sure that all fibers and connectors are clean.

•

Make sure that all fibers are labeled.

Action Step

Action

1

Open the OMX drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pulling the drawer toward you until it is fully open.

2

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-31 on page 8-51) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 3.

red spring-loaded locking clip or no locking clip

no action is required. Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip (Figure 8-32 on page 8-51) automatically clicks the equipment drawer open into place. Go to step 3.

3

Select the appropriate step. If you are routing fibers for the

Then go to

OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM

step 4

OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM

step 5

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-48 Fiber management Procedure 8-8 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM Step

Action

4

Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to circuit packs from the right side of the OMX drawer as illustrated in Figure 8-28 on page 8-49. Route optical SC/FC patch cords intended for backbone or cross-over connections the same way. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties. Go to step 7.

5

Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to circuit packs from the right or left side of the OMX drawer as illustrated in Figure 8-29 on page 8-50. The choice to route from right or left depends on the location of the 5100 shelf holding the circuit packs compared with the location of the OMX drawer. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties.

6

Route optical fibers intended for backbone or cross-over connections through the left or right side of the OMX drawer as illustrated in Figure 8-29 on page 8-50. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Optical fiber routing for these connections is more accessible from the left because the required connectors are on the left. See Figure 8-30 on page 8-50 for the front fiber connector locations and names. Note 2: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 3: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 4: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-49 Procedure 8-8 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM or the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM Step

Action

7

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf.

8

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

9

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. —end—

Figure 8-28 Routing fiber for the OMX 1CH OADM ITU CWDM OM2701t.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-50 Fiber management Figure 8-29 Routing fiber for the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM (left and right side) OM3666.jpg

Figure 8-30 Front fiber connectors in the OMX 4CH OADM ITU CWDM (NTPM34JA) OM2700t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-51 Figure 8-31 Locking a non-spring-loaded locking clip on an equipment drawer (sample) OM2883t

Note 1: For an equipment drawer with a beige non-spring-loaded locking clip, you must lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Note 2: Before you close the equipment drawer, you must return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position. Figure 8-32 Unlocking a spring-loaded locking clip on an equipment drawer (sample) OM3667.jpg

Note 1: For an equipment drawer with a red spring-loaded locking clip, no action is required when you open the equipment drawer. The red spring-loaded locking clip automatically clicks into place to keep the equipment drawer open. Note 2: Before you close the equipment drawer, you must push the red spring-loaded locking clip down.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-52 Fiber management

Procedure 8-9 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the OMX 4CH CWDM (NT0H33JA/KA) or OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps (NT0H33JB/KB). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation. Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

Requirements Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean. Make sure all fibers are labelled. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-53 Procedure 8-9 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps

Action Step

Action

1

Open the OMX drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties.

2

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer Then has a beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the locking clip beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-31 on page 8-51) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 3. red spring-loaded no action is required. locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip clip (Figure 8-32 on page 8-51) automatically clicks the equipment drawer open into place. Go to step 3.

3

Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs from right side of the OMX drawer. See Figure 8-38 on page 8-59. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

4

Route optical fibers intended for backbone or cross-over connections through the left or right side of the OMX drawer. See Figure 8-37 on page 8-59 and Figure 8-38 on page 8-59. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note: Optical fiber routing for these connections is more accessible from the left, because the required connectors are on the left. See Figure 8-33 on page 8-55 or Figure 8-35 on page 8-57, and Figure 8-34 on page 8-56 or Figure 8-36 on page 8-58. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-54 Fiber management Procedure 8-9 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH CWDM or OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps Step

Action

5

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf.

6

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

7

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-55 Figure 8-33 Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM (C-band) OM0899t

Rear (Filter connections) B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 1 DROP

BAND 2 DROP

BAND 3 DROP

BAND 4 DROP

B O T

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 1 ADD

BAND 2 ADD

BAND 3 ADD

BAND 4 ADD

T O P

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 1 ADD

BAND 2 ADD

BAND 3 ADD

BAND 4 ADD

T O P

B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 1 DROP

BAND 2 DROP

BAND 3 DROP

BAND 4 DROP

B O T

Front (External connections)

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-56 Fiber management Figure 8-34 Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM (L-band) OM0900t

Rear (Filter connections) B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 5 DROP

BAND 6 DROP

BAND 7 DROP

BAND 8 DROP

B O T

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 5 ADD

BAND 6 ADD

BAND 7 ADD

BAND 8 ADD

T O P

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 5 ADD

BAND 6 ADD

BAND 7 ADD

BAND 8 ADD

T O P

B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 5 DROP

BAND 6 DROP

BAND 7 DROP

BAND 8 DROP

B O T

Front (External connections)

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-57 Figure 8-35 Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps (C-band) OM2819t

Rear (Filter connections) B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 1 DROP

BAND 2 DROP

BAND 3 DROP

BAND 4 DROP

B O T

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 1 ADD

BAND 2 ADD

BAND 3 ADD

BAND 4 ADD

T O P

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 1 ADD

BAND 2 ADD

BAND 3 ADD

BAND 4 ADD

T O P

B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 1 DROP

BAND 2 DROP

BAND 3 DROP

BAND 4 DROP

B O T OTS IN MONITOR

OTS OUT MONITOR

Front (External connections)

Faceplate

OTS IN MONITOR OTS OUT MONITOR

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-58 Fiber management Figure 8-36 Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH CWDM with dual taps (L-band) OM2818t

Rear (Filter connections) B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 5 DROP

BAND 6 DROP

BAND 7 DROP

BAND 8 DROP

B O T

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 5 ADD

BAND 6 ADD

BAND 7 ADD

BAND 8 ADD

T O P

T O P

OTS IN

THRU IN

BAND 5 ADD

BAND 6 ADD

BAND 7 ADD

BAND 8 ADD

T O P

B O T

OTS OUT

THRU OUT

BAND 5 DROP

BAND 6 DROP

BAND 7 DROP

BAND 8 DROP

B O T OTS IN MONITOR

OTS OUT MONITOR

Front (External connections)

Faceplate

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

OTS IN MONITOR

OTS OUT MONITOR

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-59 Figure 8-37 Patch cord routing from the left OM0995p

Figure 8-38 Patch cord routing from the right OM0996p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-60 Fiber management

Procedure 8-10 Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers •

within the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NT0H33AA) or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NT0H33BA) or

•

to the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB) or the OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA)

Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-61 Procedure 8-10 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do so could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened.

Requirements •

Make sure the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NT0H33AA), OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NT0H33BA), OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB), or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-12 on page 4-65.

•

Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean.

•

Make sure all fibers are labeled.

Action Step

Action

1

Select your first step.

2

If the OMX is equipped with a

Then go to

drawer that you pull open using latches

step 2

hinged door

step 10

Open the OMX drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-62 Fiber management Procedure 8-10 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM Step

Action

3

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer Then has a beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the locking clip beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-31 on page 8-51) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 4. red spring-loaded no action is required. locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip clip (Figure 8-32 on page 8-51) automatically clicks the equipment drawer open into place. Go to step 4.

4

Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the west plane from the left side of the west OMX drawer. See Figure 8-41 on page 8-67 (OMX 4CH ITU CWDM) or Figure 8-42 on page 8-67 (OMX 8CH ITU CWDM). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties.

5

Route SC/FC patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the east plane from right side of the east OMX drawer. See Figure 8-41 on page 8-67 (OMX 4CH ITU CWDM) or Figure 8-42 on page 8-67 (OMX 8CH ITU CWDM). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-63 Procedure 8-10 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM Step

Action

6

Route optical fibers intended for backbone or cross-over connections through the left or right side of the OMX drawer. See Figure 8-41 on page 8-67 (OMX 4CH ITU CWDM) or Figure 8-42 on page 8-67 (OMX 8CH ITU CWDM). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note: Optical fiber routing for these connections is more accessible from the left, because the required connectors are on the left. See Figure 8-39 on page 8-65, and Figure 8-40 on page 8-66.

7

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf.

8

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

9

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. You have completed this procedure. 10

Unlock the door (see Figure 8-43 on page 8-68) by turning the captive screw counter clockwise to access the ports.

11

Consult your system diagram for site-specific details to route the fibers to the appropriate ports. •

for “Patch cord routing on an OMX 4CH ITU CWDM—1471-1531 nm (NTPM35AA)”, Figure 8-43 on page 8-68

•

for “Patch cord routing on an OMX 4CH ITU CWDM—1551-1611 nm (NTPM35AB)”, Figure 8-44 on page 8-69

•

for “Patch cord routing on an OMX 8CH ITU CWDM—1471-1611 nm (NTPM35BA)”, Figure 8-45 on page 8-70 —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-64 Fiber management Procedure 8-10 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM or OMX 8CH ITU CWDM Step

Action

12

Route patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the west plane from the left side of the OMX. Note: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in. (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

13

Route patch cords that connect to OCLD circuit packs seated in the east plane from the right side of the OMX. Note: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in. (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

14

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle optical fiber entering and exiting the OMX.

15

Close the door, making sure that the optical fibers are not pinched.

16

Lock the door by turning the captive screw clockwise. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-65 Figure 8-39 Connector labeling for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM OM1956t

Rear fiber connection (Internal) B O T

OTS OUT

1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm DROP DROP DROP DROP

B O T

T O P

OTS IN

1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm ADD ADD ADD ADD

T O P

T O P

OTS IN

1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm ADD ADD ADD ADD

T O P

B O T

OTS OUT

1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm DROP DROP DROP DROP

B O T

Front fiber connection (External)

Note: For connector labeling for the OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35AA/AB), see Figure 8-43 on page 8-68 and Figure 8-44 on page 8-69.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-66 Fiber management Figure 8-40 Connector labeling for the OMX 8CH ITU CWDM OM1957p

Rear fiber connection (Internal) B O T

OTS OUT

1471 nm 1491 nm 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm 1591 nm 1611 nm DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP

B O T

T O P

OTS IN

1471 nm 1491 nm 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm 1591 nm 1611 nm ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD

T O P

T O P

OTS IN

1471 nm 1491 nm 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm 1591 nm 1611 nm ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD ADD

T O P

B O T

OTS OUT

1471 nm 1491 nm 1511 nm 1531 nm 1551 nm 1571 nm 1591 nm 1611 nm DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP DROP

B O T

Front fiber connection (External)

Note: For connector labeling for the OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (NTPM35BA), see Figure 8-45 on page 8-70.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-67 Figure 8-41 Patch cord routing - OMX 4CH ITU CWDM (left and right side) OM2138t

Figure 8-42 Patch cord routing - OMX 8CH ITU CWDM (left and right side) OM2139t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-68 Fiber management Figure 8-43 Patch cord routing on an OMX 4CH ITU CWDM—1471-1531 nm (NTPM35AA) OM3687.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-69 Figure 8-44 Patch cord routing on an OMX 4CH ITU CWDM—1551-1611 nm (NTPM35AB) OM3688.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-70 Fiber management Figure 8-45 Patch cord routing on an OMX 8CH ITU CWDM—1471-1611 nm (NTPM35BA) OM3689.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-71

Procedure 8-11 Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA or NT0H32KA) or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JB/JC). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Use this procedure only for fiber routing, not for connecting modules. For more information on connection procedures, refer to Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221. Note: No fiber slack storage devices are provided inside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. You must manage fiber slack outside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. The steps in this procedure provide guidelines on fiber management. Make sure that you confirm the preferred method of fiber slack management for the system with the person responsible for installation.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment in a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If you are using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-72 Fiber management Procedure 8-11 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the slider adapters (holding the fiber connectors) are completely inserted back into place before closing the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz front panel. Failure to do so can cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always follow the fiber routing guidelines within this procedure.

Requirements Before you start this procedure, make sure that •

the OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA or NT0H32KA) or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JB.JC) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-12 on page 4-65.

•

all fibers and connectors are clean

•

all fibers are labeled

•

you find out the strategy for fiber slack management for the system from your next level of support (for installation)

Table 8-4 lists the tools and materials required to route the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz fibers. Table 8-4 Tools and materials for routing fibers in the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz Item

Quantity

Supplied

#2 Phillips screwdriver

1

no

√

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-73 Procedure 8-11 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

Action Step

Action

1

Use a Phillips screwdriver to unscrew the two lock-screws on the top side (left and right) of the front panel of the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. Then pull down the front panel. See Figure 8-46 for an view of the top right lock screw (front panel closed Note: The internal fibers are already routed inside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz.

2

For the routing of external fibers, follow the inter-shelf routing fiber diagram inside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz front panel (see Figure 8-47). For external and internal fiber routing in the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz, see Figure 8-48. For external fibers, follow the guidelines shown on the inter-shelf routing fiber label, which are described as follows: •

Slider adapters on the left side: Route to the left side of the drawer the duplex LC fibers going to the slider adapters for — Band 1 and Band 2 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA), and — Band 5 and Band 6 on the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32KA) — Band 1 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JBE5) — Band 3 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JCE5)

•

Slider adapters in the center: Route to the right side of the drawer — the SC fibers going to the OTS slider adapters for both the C-band and the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM, and — the L-band slider adapters on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM. (These ports are the L-band upgrade ports only available on the NT0H32JA.) — the SC fibers going to the THRU slider adapters for Band 1 and 2 and Band 3 and 4 OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz

•

Slider adapters on the right side: Route to the left side of the drawer the duplex LC fibers going to the slider adapters for — Band 3 and Band 4 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32JA), and — Band 7 and Band 8 on the L-band OMX 16CH DWDM (NT0H32KA) — Band 2 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JBE5) — Band 4 on the C-band OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (NT0H32JCE5) —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-74 Fiber management Procedure 8-11 (continued) Routing fibers for the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz Step

Action Note: Figure 8-48 shows the external fibers connected in the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. For more information on connection procedures, refer to Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.

3

Make sure that the fibers enter and exit the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz through the apertures on the side of the drawer. See Figure 8-46 for a view of the fibers entering and exiting the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz (front panel closed). Note 1: Store fiber slack outside the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz, using alternative methods. For example, tie fiber bundles (fastened with curly locks or Velcro cable ties) on the side of the rack. Make sure that you confirm the preferred method of fiber slack management with the person responsible for installation. Note 2: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

4

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the OMX 16CH DWDM. See Figure 8-46 and Figure 8-48.

5

Pull up the front panel and secure the two external lock-screws to close the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-75 Figure 8-46 Lock screw on the OMX 16CH DWDM or OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz front panel (front panel closed) OM2613p

Figure 8-47 Inter-shelf fiber routing label inside the OMX 16CH DWDM front cover OM2626p

Note: The inter-shelf routing label inside the OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz is similar to the one in Figure 8-47. 565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-76 Fiber management Figure 8-48 Routing of fibers inside the OMX 16CH DWDM OM2627p

Note: Fiber routing inside the OMX 16CH DWDM 100 GHz is the same as shown in Figure 8-48.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-77

Procedure 8-12 Routing fibers for the OSC tray Follow this procedure to route optical fibers for the OSC tray. When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that all connectors are adequately cleaned before you make the connections described in this procedure.

CAUTION Clean connectors to avoid system degradation

When connecting fibers and components, clean e very connector inside and outside each circuit pack and module to avoid system degradation.

CAUTION Observe minimum bend radius

Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing optical fiber. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-78 Fiber management Procedure 8-12 (continued) Routing fibers for the OSC tray

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

To avoid damaging fiber optic patch cords, ensure that you push individual bulkhead connector devices back into place before you close the OSC tray.

CAUTION Label all patch cords clearly

Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct wavelength band and function (Add or Drop) information.

Fiber routing guidelines for the OSC tray Guideline Detail 1

Route optical fibers to the right, as shown in Figure 8-49 on page 8-79.

2

Use the slack management components for fiber slack.

3

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the OSC tray. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-79 Figure 8-49 Fiber routing in the east and west OSC trays with tap OM0726p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-80 Fiber management

Procedure 8-13 Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps Follow this procedure to route optical fibers for the OSC splitter/coupler tray with dual taps. When you install the 5100 shelves and equipment into a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that all connectors are cleaned before you make the connections described in this procedure.

CAUTION Risk of system degradation

When connecting fibers and components, clean every connector inside and outside each circuit pack and module to avoid system degradation.

CAUTION Observe minimum bend radius

Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing optical fiber.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

To avoid damaging fiber optic patch cords, make sure that you push individual bulkhead connector devices back into place before you close the OSC with dual taps drawer. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-81 Procedure 8-13 (continued) Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps

CAUTION Label all patch cords clearly

Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct information.

Requirements Before you start this procedure, make sure that •

the drawer for the OSC Splitter/Coupler tray assembly with dual taps (NT0H57GB, NT0H57GC) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-15 on page 4-96.

•

the OSC splitter/coupler module(s) with dual taps are installed in the drawer (NT0H57GA). For installation information, see Procedure 4-15 on page 4-96.

•

the data communication cable (Ethernet cable) has been installed

•

all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 9, “Cleaning connectors”)

•

all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 8-1)

When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the OSC splitter/coupler tray with dual taps to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-82 Fiber management Procedure 8-13 (continued) Routing fibers for the OSC tray with dual taps

Fiber routing guidelines for the OSC tray with dual taps Guideline Detail 1

Route optical fibers to the right, as shown in Figure 8-50 on page 8-83. In Figure 8-50, although not shown, the fibers are routed inside the drawer at the rear.

2

Use the slack management components for fiber slack. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. If the bend radius limiters in the front left of the tray are used to route the excess fiber, make sure that the monitoring fibers going to the taps on the faceplate are not buried under the external fibers that are connected to the tray. Quick and easy access is required for back-side fiber cleaning. To ensure adequate access, you must disconnect the monitoring fibers, cap them with dust caps, route the excess fiber coming from and outside the tray. Then you must uncap the monitoring fibers, clean them, and reconnect them to the internal monitoring ports of the faceplate.

3

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the tray. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-83 Figure 8-50 Drawer with two OSC splitter/coupler trays with dual taps OM2671p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-84 Fiber management

Procedure 8-14 Installing a 90-degree bootclip to a patch cord boot (for Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel, only) Use this procedure to install a 90-degree bootclip to the boot of a patch cord to be routed to a Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel (TPT-10), NT0H59AC. At the TPT-10 end, Ciena recommends patch cords with LC pigtails. At the other end (which you attach to the circuit pack), Ciena recommends patch cords with LC 45-degree 1.6 mm pigtails. For ordering information, see NTT862HB in “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110, Part 3.

Requirements Make sure that you have one 90-degree bootclip for each fiber that you are routing to the TPT-10. The TPT-10 is shipped with 20 bootclips. If you are routing more than 20 fibers to and from the TPT-10, you can order extra bootclips separately. For ordering information, see NTT862HB in “565/5100/5200 ordering information” on page 13-1 in Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110, Part 3.

Procedure steps Step

Action

1

Install a bootclip onto the fiber in front of the LC boot.

2

Slide the bootclip onto the LC boot until securely seated (see Figure 8-51 on page 8-85). You have completed this procedure. Continue with Procedure 8-15 on page 8-86. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-85 Figure 8-51 Install bootclip up against white sleeve CPL0595.jpg

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-86 Fiber management

Procedure 8-15 Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray ATTENTION Make sure that you perform Procedure 8-14 on page 8-84 before you route fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray, 10 channel (TPT-10), NT0H59AC. Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers from the Transponder Protection Tray (NT0H59AA, NT0H59AB, NT0H59BA, NT0H59BB, or NT0H59AC) through the fiber management trough below the card cage. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 in. (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-87 Procedure 8-15 (continued) Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any equipment drawers. Failure to do so can cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the equipment drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the equipment drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the equipment drawer is opened.

Requirements •

Make sure that the Transponder Protection Tray (NT0H59AA, NT0H59AB, NT0H59BA, NT0H59BB, or NT0H59AC) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-21 on page 4-121.

•

The Transponder Protection Tray cable (Ethernet cable) has been installed.

•

Make sure that all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 10 “Cleaning connectors”).

•

Make sure that all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 8-1 on page 8-6).

When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the Transponder Protection Tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.

Action Step

Action

1

Select your first step. If the Transponder Protection Tray is equipped with a

Then go to

drawer that you pull open using latches

step 2

hinged door (NT0H59AC)

step 9

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-88 Fiber management Procedure 8-15 (continued) Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray Step

Action

2

Open the Transponder Protection Tray by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the equipment drawer and pull the equipment drawer toward you until it is fully open.

3

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer Then has a beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the locking clip beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-26 on page 8-44) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 4. red spring-loaded no action is required. locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip clip (Figure 8-27 on page 8-45) automatically clicks into place to keep the equipment drawer open. Go to step 4.

4

Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the left side according to Figure 8-52 on page 8-90 (four-filter Transponder Protection Tray) or Figure 8-53 on page 8-91 (two-filter Transponder Protection Tray). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in. (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray (for two-filter Transponder Protection Tray only). Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties.

5

To route fibers to the circuit packs, follow Procedure 8-4 on page 8-20.

6

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-89 Procedure 8-15 (continued) Routing fibers for the Transponder Protection Tray Step

Action

7

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

8

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. You have completed this procedure. 9

Unlock the door (see Figure 8-54 on page 8-92) of the Transponder Protection Tray 10 channel (TPT-10) by turning the captive screw counter clockwise to access the ports.

10

Consult your system diagram for site-specific details to route the fibers to the appropriate ports. For “TPT-10 (NT0H59AC), door open”, Figure 8-54 on page 8-92.

11

Route the fibers through the left side or right side opening of the TPT-10. Note: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 in. (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 in. (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

12

Use the fiber clip feature to manage the fibers (see Figure 8-54 on page 8-92).

13

To route fibers to the circuit packs, follow Procedure 8-4 on page 8-20.

14

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle optical fiber entering and exiting the TPT-10.

15

Close the door, making sure that the optical fibers are not pinched.

16

Lock the door by turning the captive screw clockwise. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-90 Fiber management Figure 8-52 Transponder Protection Tray (four-filter) OM0807p

Client-side connectors

1

2

3

4

B O T

CLIENT To CLIENT To CLIENT IN Rx 1 Rx 2

CLIENT To CLIENT To CLIENT IN Rx 1 Rx 2

CLIENT To CLIENT To CLIENT IN Rx 1 Rx 2

CLIENT IN

To CLIENT To CLIENT Rx 1 Rx 2

B O T

T O P

CLIENT Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT OUT Tx 1 Tx 2

CLIENT OUT

CLIENT OUT

CLIENT OUT

Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT Tx 1 Tx 2

T O P

Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT Tx 1 Tx 2

Fm CLIENT Fm CLIENT Tx 1 Tx 2

T O P

COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMMON COMMON COMMON COMMON 1 2 2 1 2 1 2 1

T O P

B O T

SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER2 SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER2 SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER SPLITTER COMBINER COMBINER COMMON 1 COMMON COMMON COMMON 1 1 1 2 2

B O T

1

2

3

4

5200-side connectors

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-91 Figure 8-53 Transponder Protection Tray (two-filter) OM0909p

1

CLIENT IN

To client Rx To client Rx 1 2

CLIENT IN

To client Rx To client Rx 1 2

B O T

T O P

CLIENT OUT

Fm client Tx Fm client Tx 2 1

CLIENT OUT

Fm client Tx Fm client Tx 2 1

T O P

T O P B O T

COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMBINER COMMON COMMON 2 2 1 1 SPLITTER COMMON

SPLITTER 1 1

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

2

B O T

SPLITTER 2

SPLITTER COMMON

SPLITTER SPLITTER 2 1

T O P B O T

2

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-92 Fiber management Figure 8-54 TPT-10 (NT0H59AC), door open OM3331.jpg+OM3329.jpg

Route fiber from ports, through fiber clips, to left or right (as applicable), and out through opening on left and right side.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-93

Procedure 8-16 Routing fibers for the patch panel Follow this procedure to route optical fibers within the patch panel for fibers that connect to OCI SRM, OCI SRM SONET SDH, OCI SRM ESCON, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 Muxponder 20G L2 ETH, Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video, or Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circui packs, or for fibers that come from the subtending equipment. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Two types of patch panels are available: the 16-port patch panel (NT0H43CA) and the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB). Note 1: You must use the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB) for Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT client-side applications. The Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit packs supports 20 client signals (10 ports each of Tx and Rx). Note 2: You can use a 16-port patch panel (NT0H43CA) or 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB) for a Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack or a Muxponder 20G ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack. Note 3: You can use a 16-port patch panel (NT0H43CA) or 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB) for the OCI SRM, OCI SRM SONET SDH, OCI SRM ESCON, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC, or Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16 circuit packs. Note 4: The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack provides 12 bidirectional client ports (24 clients). You must use more than one 16-port or one 20-port patch panel to accommodate the 24 clients. Note 5: The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack provides 4 bidirectional Ethernet (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional video (8 clients), for a total of 16 clients. You can use one 16-port patch panel to accommodate all 16 clients. Note 6: The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack provides 4 bidirectional client ports (8 fiber optical clients). You can use either one 16-port or one 20-port patch panel to accommodate the 8 fiber optical clients. (The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack provides another 8 ports, which are used for coaxial cables. The coaxial cables are managed on the rack uprights.) —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-94 Fiber management Procedure 8-16 (continued) Routing fibers for the patch panel

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the equipment rack rails with lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

Do not stare into beam or view directly with optical instruments. Class 3A laser product.

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any equipment drawers. Failure to do so can cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the equipment drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the equipment drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the equipment drawer is opened.

Requirements •

Make sure the 16-port patch panel (NT0H343CA) or 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-12 on page 4-65.

•

Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean.

•

Make sure all fibers are labeled. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-95 Procedure 8-16 (continued) Routing fibers for the patch panel

Action Step

Action

1

Open the patch panel by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open.

2

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer Then has a beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the locking clip beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-31 on page 8-51) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 3. red spring-loaded no action is required. locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip clip (Figure 8-32 on page 8-51) automatically clicks into place to keep the equipment drawer open. Go to step 3.

3

Route the patch cords (MT-RJ to SC or MTP to SC) that connect to the circuit packs seated in the east plane through the right side of the drawer (see Figure 8-55 on page 8-98 and Figure 8-58 on page 8-101). Note 1: For a list of circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel, see Table 8-5 on page 8-97. For a list of circuit packs that use the 20-port patch panel, see Table 8-6 on page 8-100. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 2: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 3: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 4: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-96 Fiber management Procedure 8-16 (continued) Routing fibers for the patch panel Step

Action

4

Route the patch cords that connect to the circuit packs seated in the west plane through the left side of the drawer (see Figure 8-56 on page 8-99 and Figure 8-59 on page 8-102). Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: For a list of circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel, see Table 8-5 on page 8-97. For a list of circuit packs that use the 20-port patch panel, see Table 8-6 on page 8-100. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 2: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 3: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 4: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties

5

Route the subtending optical fibers through the left side of the drawer (see Figure 8-57 on page 8-100 and Figure 8-60 on page 8-103). Note: For a list of circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel, see Table 8-5 on page 8-97. For a list of circuit packs that use the 20-port patch panel, see Table 8-6 on page 8-100. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

6

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf.

7

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

8

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-97

Figure 8-55 on page 8-98, Figure 8-56 on page 8-99, and Figure 8-57 on page 8-100 show an example of a fully fibered 16-port patch panel for the OCR SRM ESCON or the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit packs. For a list of other circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel and which specific ports they use, see Table 8-5. Table 8-5 Circuit packs that use the 16-port patch panel Circuit pack

Ports 1-4 or 5-8

OCI SRM

Yes

OCI SRM SONET/SDH

Yes

OCI SRM ESCON Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC

Ports 1-8

–

Yes

Yes

–

–

Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16

Yes

–

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH

–

Yes

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video

–

Yes

Note 1: You can use either the 16-port patch panel or the 20-port patch panel with the circuit packs listed in this table. bearing in mind the following details related to the Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs. The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack provides 12 bidirectional client ports (24 clients). You must use more than one 16-port or one 20-port patch panel to accommodate the 24 clients. The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack provides 4 bidirectional Ethernet (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional video (8 clients) for a total of 16 clients. You can use one 16-port patch panel to accommodate all 16 clients. Note 2: The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack is not used in the 5100 shelf.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-98 Fiber management Figure 8-55 Routing patch cords from east circuit packs (in the 16-port patch panel) OM3749

C I E N A

C P E

To RX

B O T

Fm TX

T O P

To RX

T O P

Fm TX

B O T

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Note: Labels may not appear as shown.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-99 Figure 8-56 Routing patch cords from west circuit packs (in the 16-port patch panel) OM3750

C I E N A

C P E

To RX

B O T

Fm TX

T O P

To RX

T O P

Fm TX

B O T

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Note: Labels may not appear as shown.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-100 Fiber management Figure 8-57 Routing subtending optical fibers through the patch panel (in the 16-port patch panel) OM3751

C I E N A

C P E

To RX

B O T

Fm TX

T O P

To RX

T O P

Fm TX

B O T

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Note: Labels may not appear as shown.

Note: Figure 8-58 on page 8-101, Figure 8-59 on page 8-102, and Figure 8-60 on page 8-103 show a fully fibered 20-port patch panel for the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack. For a list of other circuit packs that can use the 20-port patch panel and which specific ports they use, see Table 8-6. Table 8-6 Circuit packs that use the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB) Circuit pack

Ports 1-4 or 5-8

Ports 1-8

Ports 1-10

OCI SRM

Yes

–

–

OCI SRM SONET/SDH

Yes

–

–

–

Yes

–

Yes

–

–

Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC

–

Yes

–

Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT

–

–

Yes

OCI SRM ESCON Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-101 Table 8-6 (Continued) Circuit packs that use the 20-port patch panel (NT0H43CB) Circuit pack

Ports 1-4 or 5-8

Ports 1-8

Ports 1-10

Yes

–

–

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH

–

–

Yes

Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video

–

–

Yes

Muxponder 10 Gbit/s OTN 4xOC48/STM16

Note 1: You must use the 20-port patch panel with the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC VCAT circuit pack. For the rest of the circuit packs listed in this table you can use either the 16-port patch panel or the 20-port patch panel, bearing in mind the following details related to the Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs. The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH circuit pack provides 12 bidirectional client ports (24 clients). You must use more than one 16-port or one 20-port patch panel to accommodate the 24 clients. The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack provides 4 bidirectional Ethernet (8 clients) and 8 unidirectional video (8 clients) for a total of 16 clients. You can use one 16-port patch panel to accommodate all 16 clients. Note 2: The Muxponder 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack is not used in the 5100 shelf. Figure 8-58 Routing patch cords from east circuit packs (in the 20-port patch panel) OM2833p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-102 Fiber management Figure 8-59 Routing patch cords from west circuit packs (in the 20-port patch panel) OM2834p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-103 Figure 8-60 Routing subtending optical fibers (in the 20-port patch panel) OM2882p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-104 Fiber management

Procedure 8-17 Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler (NT0H57JB), and through the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler to the fiber management trough below the card cage. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do so could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-105 Procedure 8-17 (continued) Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler

Requirements •

Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 9 “Cleaning connectors”).

•

Make sure all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 8-1).

When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed within the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler tray, and from the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the Connecting components chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.

Action Step

Action

1

Open the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open.

2

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer Then has a beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the locking clip beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-31 on page 8-51) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 3. red spring-loaded no action is required. locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip clip (Figure 8-32 on page 8-51) automatically clicks into place to keep the equipment drawer open. Go to step 3. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-106 Fiber management Procedure 8-17 (continued) Routing fibers for the 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler Step

Action

3

Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the left side according to Figure 8-61 on page 8-107. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties.

4

Route the fibers within the drawer according to Figure 8-61 on page 8-107. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

5

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf.

6

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

7

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. 8

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-107 Figure 8-61 1310 nm Splitter/Coupler drawer OM2127t

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-108 Fiber management

Procedure 8-18 Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA Follow this procedure to route the optical fibers within the Discrete VOA tray assembly (NT0H31AG), and through the tray assembly to the fiber management trough below the card cage. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details.

Precautions When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment within a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers. If using split flex tubing to route and secure fiber-optic cables, secure the split flex tubing approximately every 12 inches (30.5 cm) to the transverse arms of the equipment rack using lacing cord or wax string.

DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Possible risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Make sure that the bulkhead connectors are lowered and snapped into place before closing any drawers. Failure to do so could cause damage to the connector unit, the fibers attached to the connector unit, or both. Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the drawer to route the fiber. Allow for sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, the fibers can become stretched and damaged when the drawer is opened. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-109 Procedure 8-18 (continued) Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA

Requirements •

Make sure all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 9 “Cleaning connectors”).

•

Make sure all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 8-1).

When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed within the Discrete VOA tray, and from the Discrete VOA tray to the circuit pack cage. For connection procedures, see the Connecting components chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221.

Action Step

Action

1

Open the Discrete VOA drawer by pressing and holding the two locking latches on the drawer and pull the drawer toward you until it is fully open.

2

Verify whether the equipment drawer has a locking clip. The locking clip is located in the back left corner of the equipment drawer. If the equipment drawer Then has a beige non-spring-loaded lock the equipment drawer open by rotating the locking clip beige non-spring-loaded locking clip counter-clockwise (Figure 8-31 on page 8-51) until it rests on the edge of the equipment drawer. Then go to step 3. red spring-loaded no action is required. locking clip or no locking Note: The red spring-loaded locking clip clip (Figure 8-32 on page 8-51) automatically clicks into place to keep the equipment drawer open. Go to step 3. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-110 Fiber management Procedure 8-18 (continued) Routing fibers for the Discrete VOA Step

Action

3

Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the left side or the right side, according to Figure 8-62 on page 8-111. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note 1: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Note 2: Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Note 3: The fibers entering the tray can be bundled together using curly locks or Velcro cable ties.

4

Route the fibers within the drawer according to Figure 8-62 on page 8-111. Consult your system diagram for site-specific details. Note: Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber.

5

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf.

6

If the equipment drawer has a

Then

beige non-spring-loaded locking clip

return the beige non-spring-loaded locking clip to the original upright position

red spring-loaded locking clip

push the red spring-loaded locking clip down

7

Slide the equipment drawer into the shelf.

The locking latches click when the equipment drawer is in the correct position. 8

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fiber-optic cables entering and exiting the shelf. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-111 Figure 8-62 Discrete VOA drawer OM2286p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-112 Fiber management

Procedure 8-19 Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer Follow these guidelines when you are routing fibers in and out of a DSCM drawer equipped with a DSCM tray. This procedure also provides guidelines on how to bundle fiber around bend radius limiters inside the DSCM drawer equipped with a DSCM tray assembly. The fiber management guidelines for the DSCM drawer are very similar to the fiber management guidelines for the other 565/5100/5200 drawer assemblies.

Precautions CAUTION Risk of insufficient fiber slack

Make sure that the drawer from which the fiber is being routed is fully open before you begin to route the fiber around the fiber bend radius limiters. Allow sufficient slack in the fibers entering and exiting the drawers. If sufficient slack is not left, you risk stretching the fibers when the drawer is opened.

CAUTION Risk of fiber damage

Do not stretch the fiber, or wrap the fiber on the fiber bend radius limiters too tightly. Otherwise you risk damaging the fiber. Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle fibers entering and exiting a drawer. Always use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers around the bend radius limiters inside a drawer equipped with tray assemblies.

CAUTION Risk of affecting network reliability

Before you make connections, make sure that fiber connectors are clean. Otherwise, you risk affecting network reliability.

CAUTION Risk of damage to equipment and fiber

Observe the minimum bend radius of 1.18 inches (30 mm) for the patch cords. Always use the fiber management components in the drawer to route the fiber. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-113 Procedure 8-19 (continued) Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer

Requirements Before you start this procedure, make sure that •

the DSCM drawer (NT0H57LA) is installed. For installation information, see Procedure 4-12 “Installing and grounding equipment drawers”.

•

the DSCM tray is installed in the DSCM drawer. For installation information, see Procedure 4-14 “Installing DSCM tray in a DSCM drawer”.

•

all fibers and connectors are clean (see Chapter 9 “Cleaning connectors”)

•

all fibers are labeled (see Procedure 8-1)

When you complete this procedure the optical fibers are routed from the DSCM tray inside the DSCM drawer to the side of the 5100 shelf. For connection procedures, see the “Connecting components” chapter of Connection Procedures, 323-1701-221. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-114 Fiber management Procedure 8-19 (continued) Routing fibers for a DSCM drawer

Guidelines for routing fiber Guideline Detail 1

Make sure that every fiber is labeled.

2

Route the fibers entering or exiting the tray through the opening on the right or on the left side of the drawer.

3

Route the fibers coming into the drawer from the left side around the bend radius limiters on the left side of the drawer (see Figure 8-63 on page 8-115). Route the fibers coming into the drawer from the right side around the bend radius limiters on both the right and left sides of the drawer (see Figure 8-64 on page 8-116). Follow the bend radius rule when you route fiber. Fiber can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 1.18 inch (30 mm) when you route fiber. Fibers can be damaged when you use a bend radius that is less than 3 inches (76.2 mm) when you coil or bend fiber. Store excess fiber slack within the tray. Always use the fiber bend radius limiters to coil excess fiber slack.

4

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers routed around the fiber bend radius limiters to avoid loose fibers inside a drawer. Figure 8-63 on page 8-115 illustrates how to route fibers in the DSCM drawer coming from/going to the left side opening of the drawer. Figure 8-63 shows how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters on the left side of a DSCM drawer using Velcro cables ties. Figure 8-64 on page 8-116 illustrates how to route fibers in the DSCM drawer coming from/going to the right side opening of the drawer. Figure 8-64 shows how to bundle the fibers around bend radius limiters on both the left and right sides of a DSCM drawer using Velcro cables ties. Note: For clarity, the photos for Figure 8-63 and Figure 8-64 were taken with the DSCM drawer on a table rather than in the rack. When you route fiber, the DSCM drawer is installed in the rack.

5

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers entering and exiting the drawer. See Figure 8-65 on page 8-117 for an illustration of how to bundle the fibers exiting and entering a drawer using curly Locks. See Figure 8-66 on page 8-117 for an illustration of how to bundle the fibers exiting and entering a drawer using Velcro cable ties. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-115 Figure 8-63 Routing fibers in a DSCM drawer, entering and exiting left side of drawer (with Velcro cable ties) OM2422p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-116 Fiber management Figure 8-64 Routing fibers in a DSCM drawer, entering and exiting right side of drawer (with Velcro cable ties) OM2423p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-117 Figure 8-65 Bundling fibers entering and exiting DSCM drawer (with curly locks) OM2420p

Figure 8-66 Bundling fibers entering and exiting a DSCM drawer (with Velcro cable ties) OM2421p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-118 Fiber management

Procedure 8-20 Routing fibers for the Optical Trunk Switch Follow this procedure to route optical fibers for the Optical Trunk Switch (OTS). No fiber management devices are provided on the OTS. However, some fibering guidelines are provided in this procedure to accommodate the optical connector orientation on the OTS. When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment into a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that all connectors are adequately cleaned before you make any fiber connection.

CAUTION Observe minimum bend radius

Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing optical fiber.

CAUTION Label all patch cords clearly

Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct information.

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-119 Procedure 8-20 (continued) Routing fibers for the Optical Trunk Switch

Fiber routing guidelines for the OTS Guideline Detail 1

Route optical fibers to the left of the OTS, since the optical connectors are oriented on the left.

2

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the OTS.

3

Use the fiber management devices provided by the customer (split flex tubing recommended) to route the fibers to their destination. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-120 Fiber management

Procedure 8-21 Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch Follow this procedure to route optical fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch (ETS). No fiber management devices are provided on the ETS. However, some fibering guidelines are provided in this procedure to accommodate the optical connector orientation on the ETS. When installing the 5100 shelves and equipment into a new or existing rack, it is the customer’s responsibility to provide fiber management. When the customer’s fiber management requirements are not specified, Ciena recommends that split flex tubing be used to route and secure fibers.

Precautions DANGER Invisible laser radiation

The 565/5100/5200 operates up to a Hazard Level of k x 3A (IEC 60825-2:2000) or 1M (IEC 60825-2:2004). Use only viewing instruments with proper optical attenuation.

CAUTION Risk of equipment damage

Make sure that all connectors are adequately cleaned before you make any fiber connection.

CAUTION Observe minimum bend radius

Observe the minimum bend radius of patch cords when routing optical fiber.

CAUTION Label all patch cords clearly

Label all fiber-optic patch cords with the correct information.

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Fiber management 8-121 Procedure 8-21 (continued) Routing fibers for the Enhanced Trunk Switch

Fiber routing guidelines for the ETS Guideline Detail 1

Route optical fibers to the right of the ETS, since the optical connectors are oriented on the right.

2

Use curly locks or Velcro cable ties to bundle the fibers exiting the ETS shelf area.

3

Use the fiber management devices provided by the customer (split flex tubing recommended) to route the fibers to their destination. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

8-122 Fiber management

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-1

Cleaning connectors

9-

Use the procedures in this chapter to clean connectors. The performance of an optical fiber connector depends on how clean the connector and coupling are at the time of connection.

Cleaning zones Optical connector cleaning zones for routine maintenance procedures include the ferrule cylinder and end face surfaces. You only have to clean the circuit pack or coupler adapter housings during the initial installation, or when you suspect performance is reduced because of contamination. Dust and dirt particles can bind to the end-face of the ferrule, especially when the optical power going through the fiber is high. If you remate dirty connectors you can damage the end-face. To correct this type of damage you require special polishing equipment and techniques beyond the scope of routine maintenance. If you discover a damaged ferrule end-face, contact Ciena. Figure 9-1 on page 9-2 shows an example of a typical optical fiber connector and adapter housing. The ferrule provides the physical support for the optical fiber. The adapter housing is used to connect the two optical fibers together by aligning the two ferrules.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-2 Cleaning connectors Figure 9-1 Typical optical fiber connector and adapter housing OM0088t

Guide pin

Plug retainer Ferrule

Adapter housing

Requirements Ciena recommends that you always clean fiber-optic connectors before connecting to transmission equipment, test equipment, patch panels, or other connectors. Connector cleaning: •

ensures that fiber-optic assemblies work at their correct power level, by removing any dust or particles that could lead to optical power attenuation

•

prevents damage to alignment sleeves and adapter housings

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-3

Precautions Make sure that you review these caution and danger warning notices before you follow any cleaning procedure in this chapter.

DANGER Risk of personal injury

Wear safety glasses when you work with the canned compressed gas to avoid getting dust in your eyes. Wear safety glasses when working with isopropyl alcohol. Isopropyl alcohol can cause eye irritation on contact. To avoid extended inhalation of alcohol vapors, use only small amounts of alcohol and work in a clean and ventilated area. To avoid direct skin contact with the isopropyl alcohol and to avoid contaminating the ferrules with skin oils, it is preferable to wear vinyl gloves.

DANGER Risk of personal injury

Do not look into the end of fiber-optic connectors or into faceplate connectors of installed circuit packs. The light source used in fiber-optic devices can damage your eyes.

CAUTION Risk of shelf malfunction

Ciena recommends that you do not use cellular phones at any 565/5100/5200 site. The use of cellular phones in proximity to 565/5100/5200 equipment can cause shelf malfunction.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-4 Cleaning connectors

CAUTION Risk of connectors contamination

To reduce the risk of oil contamination on connectors, do not use commercial compressed air or hose air when cleaning connectors and receptacles. Always use canned compressed gas to remove excess dust and dirt. Do the appropriate cleaning process before remating connectors with their receptacles. To prevent contamination, make sure you cover the optical faceplate connectors of all installed circuit packs and all the unconnected fiber connector ferrules with dust caps. To avoid applying any oil from your fingers or other contaminants to the end face of the ferrule, handle connectors carefully.

CAUTION Risk of signal degradation

Do not allow the solvent to dry on the ferrule. Dried solvent leaves a residual film on ferrule surfaces that prevents the fiber-optic assembly from working correctly.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-5

Handling optical fibers When you work with optical fibers, you must take these precautions: •

Handle optical fibers with caution. Place the optical fibers in a safe location during installation, in order to avoid any fiber bending or anything else that could damage the fiber.

•

Follow the manufacturer instructions when you use an optical test set. Incorrect calibration or control settings can create hazardous levels of radiation.

You can use the Universal fiber tool to facilitate the insertion and extraction of fiber connectors to prepare for the fiber cleaning procedures in this chapter. The Universal fiber tool is provided with the NT0H50BB shelf, the Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit pack, and the Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack. Figure 9-2 shows the Universal fiber tool being used to access dual LC fiber connectors. Figure 9-2 Disconnecting an LC connector using the Universal fiber tool (NTN458TC) OM2647p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-6 Cleaning connectors

Requirements Table 9-1 lists the tools and materials recommended to complete the procedures in this chapter. Table 9-1 Tools and materials required to complete cleaning procedures Vendor

Item

Description

TEXWIPE

TX404 Absorbond

Lint free, fiber free, 100% polyester cloth, clean-room certified

TEXWIPE

TX806 Wipe

Pre-moistened alcohol wipes

Chemical Supply House (Chemtronics)

Isopropyl Alcohol, reagent grade

Certified particle grade, filtered through 0.2 (store in a plastic squeeze bottle, available from Chemtronics)

Coventry (Chemtronics)

48040 Mini Foam swab

Mini foam swab in static-free package

Coventry (Chemtronics)

1.25 mm Sleeve Cleaning swab

Used to clean 1.25 mm female optical adaptors

ARIA Technologies Inc.

CLETOP stick-type Dry cloth on a stick (1.25 mm diameter)

NOYES

200X (or higher) Fiberscope

Fiber-optic inspection microscope kit, 200X or higher magnification

AlcoaFL

FCC-02 PREP

Self-contained optical fiber connector cleaner, miracreation polyester tape

AlcoaFL

ACT-1

Adapter cleaning tips

(multiple vendors)

Vinyl gloves

NTT international

CLETOP reel type A Optical fiber connector cleaner (on a wiping roll)

NTT-AT

Optical reel cleaner Used to clean male MPO type multifiber (part number 6226) connectors

NTT-AT

Optical reel cleaner Used to clean female MPO type multifiber (part number 6227) connectors

multiple vendors

Optical fiber connector cleaning kit

Each cleaning kit case typically contains Cletop Reel cleaner, swabs, optic-preparation units, alcohol pump dispenser, space for compressed air can

multiple vendors

canned compressed air

Used to clean female optical adapter housing

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-7 Table 9-1 (Continued) Tools and materials required to complete cleaning procedures Vendor

Item

Description

multiple vendors

safety glasses

Use to protect eyes when canned compressed air is used

multiple vendors

antistatic strap

For ESD protection when manipulating electronic components

multiple vendors

fiber patch cord labels

To identify optical patch cords

Ciena

optical connectors dust covers

Provided with the circuit packs

Ciena

Universal fiber tool (NTN548TC)

Required only for Procedure 9-5, “Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing”. Provided with the Muxponder circuit pack and on the inside cover of the 5100 shelf. Can be used to disconnect and connect the duplex LC fiber on the SFP module.

Procedure list Table 9-2 lists the procedures in this chapter. Table 9-2 Connector cleaning procedures Procedure

Page

Comments

9-1 Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex)

9-8

Recommended.

9-2 Cleaning MT-RJ connectors

9-12

Recommended.

9-3 Cleaning MPO connectors

9-14

Recommended.

9-4 Cleaning adapter housings and (when 9-16 applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs

Recommended.

9-5 Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing

9-20

Recommended.

9-6 Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end

9-26

Recommended to assess cleanliness of optical fiber end after any of the above cleaning procedures are performed.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-8 Cleaning connectors

Procedure 9-1 Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex) Follow this procedure if you want to use a connector cleaning kit to clean SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex).

Requirements Ciena recommends that you use the tools and materials listed in Table 9-1 on page 9-6 to clean the connectors.

Precautions Do not clean the adapter housing when the connector is attached to it. If an optical fiber connector is inside a circuit pack, you must remove the circuit pack and disconnect the connector from the sleeve before performing this procedure. Ensure that there is no traffic running on the circuit pack when the fibers are disconnected.

CAUTION Risk of damage and personal injury

Make sure that you review the caution and danger warning notices listed in the introduction in this chapter. See “Precautions” on page 9-3. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-9 Procedure 9-1 (continued) Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex)

Action Step

Action

1

If the optical fiber connectors are

Then

inserted in a circuit pack

make sure the circuit pack is not carrying traffic. If there is traffic running on the circuit pack, and if there is a protection path available, switch the traffic off the span using Procedure 3-10 “Switching traffic off a span in a path-protected network” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. If there is no protection path available, advise your network administrator before continuing the procedure. Disconnect the fiber connectors from the adapter housing on the circuit pack, then go to step 2.

are not inserted in a circuit pack

If the connectors have protection caps, remove the caps, then go to step 2.

2

If there is a compressed gas can available in the cleaning tools, use it to remove loose dust and dirt particles from the cylindrical and end-face surfaces of the connector ferrule.

3

Select which of the following cleaning methods to use: a. If there are pre-moistened pads or alcohol bottle with lint-free cloth available in the cleaning tools, go to step 4. b. If there is a Cletop Reel available in the cleaning tools, go to step 10. Note: In some situation of incrusted dust-particles, only the alcohol cleaning method will work properly

4

Select one of the following steps: a. Take a new lint-free cloth (TX-404) and fold it twice (long edge to long edge); then go to step 5. b. Open a pre-moistened wipe (TX-806) and go to step 6.

5

Use the plastic squeeze bottle to put one drop of alcohol on the center of the lint free cloth.

6

Put the end face surface of the connector in the center of the lint-free cloth (or wipe). Clean the rectangular face using a figure eight movement with the cloth.

7

While the ferrule surfaces are still wet with solvent, fold a new, dry, lint free cloth (TX-404) in half and use it to remove the remaining solvent. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-10 Cleaning connectors Procedure 9-1 (continued) Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex) Step

Action

8

See Procedure 9-6 “Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end” on page 9-26 to check the cleanliness of the ferrule end face with a fiberscope. If the ferrule is not clean, repeat step 4 to step 7 until no indication of contamination remains.

9

To prevent new contamination: If in step 1 of this procedure

Then

the optical fibers were inserted in a circuit pack and a protection switch was performed

reconnect the fibers into their original location. make sure the adapter housing is clean before reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4) Then reroute the traffic back to the original span using Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual, force, or lockout switch from a protection path” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into the original location. Make sure the adapter housing is clean before inserted in a circuit reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4). pack but no protection switch was performed the optical fibers were cover the connector with a clean dust cap if you are not inserted in a not going to use the connector immediately. circuit pack

This is the end of the cleaning procedure if you are using pre-moistened pads of lint-free cloth with an alcohol bottle. 10

Gently wipe the end face of the ferrules with a clean segment of the Cletop Reel cleaner, in the direction indicated on the cleaner. In the case of a simplex connector, while wiping in this direction, slowly rotate the fiber connector. Repeat this motion on the second wiping slot on the Cletop Reel.

11

See Procedure 9-6 “Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end” on page 9-26 to check the cleanliness of the ferrule end face with a fiberscope. If the ferrule is not clean, repeat step 10 until no indication of contamination remains. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-11 Procedure 9-1 (continued) Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex) Step

Action

12

To prevent new contamination: If in step 1 of this procedure

Then

the optical fibers were inserted in a circuit pack and a protection switch was performed

reconnect the fibers into their original location. make sure the adapter housing is clean before reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4) Then reroute the traffic back to the original span using Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual, force, or lockout switch from a protection path” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into the original location. Make sure the adapter housing is clean before inserted in a circuit reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4). pack but no protection switch was performed the optical fibers were cover the connector with a clean dust cap if you are not inserted in a not going to use the connector immediately. circuit pack —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-12 Cleaning connectors

Procedure 9-2 Cleaning MT-RJ connectors Follow this procedure to clean MT-RJ connectors.

Requirements Ciena recommends that you use the tools and materials listed in Table 9-1 on page 9-6 to clean the connectors.

Precautions Do not clean the adapter housing when the connector is attached to it. If an optical fiber connector is inside a circuit pack, you must remove the circuit pack and disconnect the connector from the sleeve before performing this procedure. Ensure that there is no traffic running on the circuit pack when the fibers are disconnected.

CAUTION Risk of damage and personal injury

Make sure that you review the caution and danger warning notices listed in the introduction in this chapter. See “Precautions” on page 9-3.

Action Step

Action

1

If the optical fiber connectors are

Then

inserted in a circuit pack make sure the circuit pack is not carrying traffic. If there is traffic running on the circuit pack, and if there is a protection path available, switch the traffic off the span using Procedure 3-10 “Switching traffic off a span in a path-protected network” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. If there is no protection path available, advise your network administrator before continuing the procedure. Disconnect the fiber connectors from the adapter housing on the circuit pack, then go to step 2. are not inserted in a circuit pack

If the connectors have protection caps, remove the caps, then go to step 2.

—continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-13 Procedure 9-2 (continued) Cleaning MT-RJ connectors Step

Action

2

Use canned compressed gas to remove loose dust and dirt particles from the rectangular and end-face surfaces of the connector ferrule.

3

Select one of the following steps: a. Take a new lint-free cloth (TX-404) and fold it twice (long edge to long edge); then go to step 4. b. Open a pre-moistened wipe (TX-806) and go to step 5.

4

Use the plastic squeeze bottle to put one drop of alcohol on the center of the lint free cloth.

5

Put the end face surface of the connector in the center of the lint-free cloth (or wipe). Clean the rectangular face using a figure eight movement with the cloth.

6

While the connector surface is still wet with alcohol, fold a new lint-free cloth (TX-404) in half and place it on a clean, flat, smooth surface.

7

Hold the connector vertically and remove any remaining particles from the connector by wiping the end face on the cloth in a figure eight movement.

8

See Procedure 9-6 “Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end” on page 9-26 to check the cleanliness of the ferrule end face with a fiberscope. If the ferrule is not clean, repeat step 3 to step 7 until no indication of contamination remains.

9

To prevent new contamination: If in step 1 of this procedure

Then

the optical fibers were inserted in a circuit pack and a protection switch was performed

reconnect the fibers into their original location. make sure the adapter housing is clean before reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4) Then reroute the traffic back to the original span using Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual, force, or lockout switch from a protection path” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into the original location. Make sure the adapter housing is clean before inserted in a circuit reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4). pack but no protection switch was performed the optical fibers were cover the connector with a clean dust cap if you are not inserted in a not going to use the connector immediately. circuit pack —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-14 Cleaning connectors

Procedure 9-3 Cleaning MPO connectors Follow this procedure to clean MPO connectors.

Requirements Ciena recommends that you use the tools and materials listed in Table 9-1 on page 9-6 to clean the connectors.

Precautions Do not clean the adapter housing when the connector is attached to it. If an optical fiber connector is inside a circuit pack, you must remove the circuit pack and disconnect the connector from the sleeve before performing this procedure. Ensure that there is no traffic running on the circuit pack when the fibers are disconnected.

CAUTION Risk of damage and personal injury

Make sure that you review the caution and danger warning notices listed in the introduction in this chapter. See “Precautions” on page 9-3.

Action Step

Action

1

If the optical fiber connectors are

Then

inserted in a circuit pack

make sure the circuit pack is not carrying traffic. If there is traffic running on the circuit pack, and if there is a protection path available, switch the traffic off the span using Procedure 3-10 “Switching traffic off a span in a path-protected network” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. If there is no protection path available, advise your network administrator before continuing the procedure. Disconnect the fiber connectors from the adapter housing on the circuit pack, then go to step 2.

are not inserted in a circuit If the connectors have protection caps, pack remove the caps, then go to step 2. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-15 Procedure 9-3 (continued) Cleaning MPO connectors Step

Action

2

Use canned compressed gas to remove loose dust and dirt particles from the rectangular and end-face surfaces of the connector ferrule.

3

Select one of the following steps: a. If you are cleaning a male MPO multifiber connector, get the NTT-AT optical reel cleaner (part number 6226), then go to step 4. b. If you are cleaning a female MPO multifiber connector, get the NTT-AT optical reel cleaner (part number 6227), then go to step 4.

4

Press the green lever on the optical reel cleaner. The metal shutter on the top of the cleaner will open, exposing the cleaning surface. Note: Fresh cleaning material is exposed each time the green lever is pressed.

5

Position the ferrule endface so that the fiber tips are in contact with the cleaning surface on the reel cleaner.

6

Wipe the ferrule endface along the cleaning material in the direction shown on the cleaner.

7

Release the green lever on the optical reel cleaner.

8

See Procedure 9-6 “Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end” on page 9-26 to check the cleanliness of the ferrule end face with a fiberscope. If the ferrule is not clean, repeat step 3 to step 7 until no indication of contamination remains.

9

To prevent new contamination: If in step 1 of this procedure

Then

the optical fibers were inserted in a circuit pack and a protection switch was performed

reconnect the fibers into their original location. make sure the adapter housing is clean before reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4) Then reroute the traffic back to the original span using Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual, force, or lockout switch from a protection path” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into the original location. Make sure the adapter housing is clean before inserted in a circuit pack but no protection reconnecting the fibers (refer to Procedure 9-4). switch was performed the optical fibers were cover the connector with a clean dust cap if you are not inserted in a circuit not going to use the connector immediately. pack —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-16 Cleaning connectors

Procedure 9-4 Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs Follow this procedure to clean adapter housings and connectors on circuit pack or modules with optical connections. Ciena recommends that you clean adapter housings and connectors on circuit packs or modules with optical connections only •

during initial installation

•

when you suspect performance is reduced because of contamination

Requirements Ciena recommends that you use the tools and materials listed in Table 9-1 on page 9-6 to clean the adapter housings and connectors on circuit pack or modules with optical connections.

Precautions Do not clean the adapter housing when the connector is attached to it. If an optical fiber connector is inside a circuit pack, you must remove the circuit pack and disconnect the connector from the sleeve before performing this procedure. Ensure that there is no traffic running on the circuit pack when the fibers are disconnected.

CAUTION Risk of damage and personal injury

Make sure that you review the caution and danger warning notices listed in the introduction in this chapter. See “Precautions” on page 9-3. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-17 Procedure 9-4 (continued) Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs

Action Step

Action

1

If the circuit pack is

Then

inserted in the shelf and there make sure the circuit pack is not carrying are optical fibers connected to traffic. If there is traffic running on the the faceplate circuit pack, and if there is a protection path available, switch the traffic off the span using Procedure 3-10 “Switching traffic off a span in a path-protected network” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310. If there is no protection path available, advise your network administrator before continuing the procedure. Disconnect the fiber connectors from the adapter housing on the faceplate, then go to step 2. not inserted in the shelf

If the faceplate connectors have protection caps, remove the caps, then go to step 3.

2

Unseat the circuit pack from the shelf. Release the lock latches at the top and bottom of the circuit pack and slide it slightly out of the shelf.

3

If the adapter housing is for

Then go to

SC, LC, or FC connectors

step 4

MT-RJ (receptacle MT-RJ device) connectors

step 11

MPO connectors

this type of adapter housing does not require cleaning. You have completed this procedure.

4

Disconnect the patch cords inside the circuit pack that are going into the adapter housing to be cleaned.

5

Use “Cleaning SC, LC, or FC-type connectors (simplex or duplex)” on page 9-8 to clean the fiber connectors inside the circuit pack. See Procedure 9-6 “Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end” on page 9-26 to check the cleanliness of the ferrule end face with a fiberscope. If the ferrule is not clean, repeat the cleaning until no indication of contamination remains. After completing the appropriate procedure, go to the next step of this procedure. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-18 Cleaning connectors Procedure 9-4 (continued) Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs Step

Action

6

While the internal patch cords are still unconnected, carefully insert the tip of a new, dry cleaning swab into the adapter housing. Note 1: The cleaning swab size is smaller for LC adapter housing compared to SC and FC adapter housing. Note 2: Solvent/alcohol should not be used for adapter housing cleaning as there is no way to determine if residue is still present after cleaning, and the solvent could get trapped in the many crevices of the adapter housing.

7

Gently rotate the tip of the swab to wipe the inside of the adapter housing.

8

Gently remove the tip of the swab and throw away the swab.

9

Repeat step 6 to step 8 for each connector adapter housing on the circuit pack/module.

10

Reconnect the internal fiber patch cords inside the circuit pack (that were disconnected and cleaned in step 4 and step 5). When completed, go to step 20.

11

To clean MT-RJ connectors, use “Cleaning MT-RJ connectors” on page 9-12, then go to the next step of this procedure.

12

Clean the MT-RJ adapter housing. Attach the extension tube supplied with the canned compressed gas to the can nozzle.

13

Carefully insert the extension tube into the optical port of the receptacle device.

14

Blow canned compressed gas into the optical port of the receptacle device to remove loose dust or dirt particles.

15

Carefully remove the extension tube from the optical port of the receptacle device.

16

Carefully insert the tip of a new, dry cleaning swab into the MT-RJ adapter housing. Note: Solvent/alcohol should not be used for adapter housing cleaning as there is no way to determine if residue is still present after cleaning, and the solvent could get trapped in the many crevices of the adapter housing.

17

Gently rotate the tip of the swab to wipe as much as possible the inside of the adapter housing.

18

Gently remove the tip of the swab and throw away the swab.

19

Repeat step 12 to step 18 if required. Note: The best way to assess the cleanliness of a receptacle MT-RJ device is by reconnecting the fibers and verifying that the traffic is no longer affected by dust particles in the receptacle. To do that, continue with the next step in this procedure. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-19 Procedure 9-4 (continued) Cleaning adapter housings and (when applicable) optical connectors on circuit packs Step

Action

20

To prevent new contamination: If in step 1 of this procedure

Then

the optical fibers were inserted in a circuit pack and a protection switch was performed

reconnect the fibers into their original location. Then reroute the traffic back to the original span using Procedure 10-54 “Removing a manual, force, or lockout switch from a protection path” in Provisioning and Operating Procedures, 323-1701-310.

the optical fibers were reconnect the fibers into the original location. inserted in a circuit pack but no protection switch was performed the optical fibers were cover the faceplate connector with a clean dust cap not inserted in a if you are not going to use the connector circuit pack immediately. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-20 Cleaning connectors

Procedure 9-5 Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing Use this procedure to clean the small form factor pluggable (SFP) and large form factor pluggable (XFP) adaptor housing. SFPs are supported on the •

Muxponder 20 Gbit/s L2 ETH (MOTR 20G L2 ETH) circuit pack

•

MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack

•

MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack

•

Muxponder 10 Gbit/s circuit packs

•

Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack

•

OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack

XFPs are supported on the •

MOTR 20G L2 ETH circuit pack

•

MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video circuit pack

•

MOTR 20G L2 ETH+Video Electrical circuit pack

•

OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack

•

OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack

•

OTR 10G Quad with Encryption (QOTR/E 10G) circuit pack

•

OTR 10G Quad (QOTR10G) circuit pack Note: The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs are equipped with receptacles (cages) for two line-side XFPs. The QOTR/E 10G and QOTR 10G circuit packs are each equipped with receptacles for four XFPs. Port 1 and Port 2 are for the line side. Port 3 and 4 are for the client side or you can provision them for the line side.

Ciena recommends that you clean SFP and XFP adapter housing only •

during initial installation

•

when you suspect performance is reduced because of contamination

For a sample illustration of an SFP module on a Muxponder 10 Gbit/s GbE/FC circuit pack, see Figure 9-3 on page 9-25. The XFP is larger than the SFP. SFPs and XFPs are referred to as pluggables in this procedure. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-21 Procedure 9-5 (continued) Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing

Requirements Ciena recommends that you use the tools and materials listed in Table 9-1 on page 9-6 to clean the adaptor housings and connectors on circuit pack or modules with optical connections.

Precautions If an optical fiber is connected to a pluggable, you must disconnect the fibers from the pluggable before performing this procedure. If client protection is not available on the subtending equipment, traffic will be lost on the pluggable whose adapter housing you are cleaning.

CAUTION Risk of damage and personal injury

Make sure that you review the caution and danger warning notices listed in the introduction of this chapter. See “Precautions” on page 9-3. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-22 Cleaning connectors Procedure 9-5 (continued) Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing Step

Action

1

Select your first step. If the pluggable whose fiber adaptor housing requires cleaning is

Then

inserted in the circuit pack and has optical fibers connected to it

make sure that the pluggable is not carrying traffic. • If the circuit pack is carrying traffic and client signal protection is available (on the subtending equipment), contact your network administrator to switch the traffic off the span. • If there is no protection path available, inform your network administrator before continuing the procedure.

Label the fiber connectors. Disconnect the fiber connectors from the pluggable. To disconnect the duplex LC fiber from the Muxponder circuit pack, use the universal fiber tool provided with the circuit pack. A universal fiber tool is not provided with the OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack, or OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack, or OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack since fiber congestion is not a concern. Then go to step 2. inserted in the circuit go to step 2 pack and has no optical fibers connected to it not inserted in the circuit go to step 3 pack —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-23 Procedure 9-5 (continued) Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing Step

Action

Removing an SFP or XFP module 2

Remove the pluggable by pulling the latch on the pluggable sideward (left or right depending on the pluggable port number) to disengage the pluggable from the port. Carefully pull the pluggable out of its receptacle without affecting fibers connected to other pluggable ports on the circuit pack.

Cleaning the pluggable adapter housing 3

Attach the extension tube supplied with the canned compressed gas to the can nozzle.

4

Remove LC male dust caps from the pluggable adaptor housing, if applicable. Carefully insert the extension tube into the optical port of the pluggable receptacle device.

5

Blow canned compressed gas into the optical port of the pluggable receptacle to remove loose dust or dirt particles.

6

Carefully remove the extension tube from the optical port of the receptacle device.

7

Carefully insert the tip of a new, dry cleaning swab into the female adapter housing on the pluggable module. Note 1: Do not use solvent or alcohol to clean adapter housings. It is not possible to determine if the solvent or alcohol has left a residue after cleaning. The solvent or alcohol can get trapped in the crevices of the adapter housing. Note 2: The majority of pluggables consist of two LC female adapter housings. For details on pluggables, see the ordering information in Chapter 13 of Network Planning and Link Engineering, 323-1701-110.

8

Gently rotate the tip of the swab to wipe as much as possible of the inside of the adapter housing.

9

Gently remove the tip of the swab. Discard the swab.

10

Repeat step 7 to step 9 for the remaining adaptor housing on the SFP module, if applicable.

11

Repeat step 3 to step 10 if required. Note: To assess the cleanliness of the pluggable receptacle device, reconnect the fibers and verify that the traffic is no longer affected by dust particles in the receptacle. Continue with step 12. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-24 Cleaning connectors Procedure 9-5 (continued) Cleaning the SFP and XFP adapter housing Preventing contamination 12

Select your next step. If in step 1 of this procedure

Then

the optical fibers were connected to the SFP module and a protection switch was performed on the client subtending equipment

reinstall the pluggable into the circuit pack. For the Muxponder circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad with Encryption circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad circuit pack, OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack, OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack, or OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack, follow Procedure 7-4 “Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules”. Make sure that the fiber connectors are clean. Then reconnect the fibers into their original location on the pluggable (refer to the labels). For the Muxponder, you can use the universal fiber tool to reconnect the duplex LC fiber. Contact your network administrator to reroute the traffic back to the original span. If the traffic is restored, the pluggable receptacle device (female adaptor housing) is now clean.

no optical fibers were inserted into the pluggable and the pluggable was installed into the circuit pack

reinstall the pluggable into the circuit pack. For the Muxponder circuit pack, to the circuit pack. For the Muxponder circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad with Encryption circuit pack, OTR 10G Quad circuit pack, OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra circuit pack, OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit pack, or OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit pack, follow the Procedure 7-4 “Installing a small form factor pluggable (SFP) or large form factor pluggable (XFP) modules”. If you are not going to use the pluggable connector immediately, cover it with a clean male dust cap.

the pluggable was not cover the pluggable connector with a clean male installed into the circuit dust cap, if you are not going to use the pluggable pack connector immediately. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-25 Figure 9-3 SFP module (on Muxponder 20G L2, Muxponder 10 Gbit/s, Muxponder 2.5 Gbit/s circuit pack, OTR 4 Gbit/s FC circuit packs) OM3668.jpg

Note: The OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra and OTR 10 Gbit/s Ultra 10GbE circuit packs are each equipped with one XFP module. The Muxponder 20G L2 circuit packs can each be equipped with two XFPs. The QOTR/E 10G and QOTR 10G circuit packs are each equipped with four XFPs. The XFP module is larger than the SFP module.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-26 Cleaning connectors

Procedure 9-6 Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end Follow this procedure to assess the cleanliness of the optical fiber end.

Requirements Ciena recommends that you use the NOYES 200X Fiberscope listed in Table 9-1 on page 9-6 for this procedure.

Precautions If an optical fiber connector is inside a circuit pack, you must remove the circuit pack and disconnect the connector from the sleeve before performing this procedure. Ensure that there is no traffic running on the circuit pack when the fibers are disconnected.

DANGER Risk of personal injury

Make sure that the optical fiber is disconnected from any light source. The light source used in fiber-optic devices can damage your eyes.

CAUTION Risk of damage and personal injury

Make sure that you review the caution and danger warning notices listed in the introduction in this chapter. See “Precautions” on page 9-3.

Action Step

Action

1

Before assessing the cleanliness of the optical fiber end, make sure the following conditions are met: •

the fiber being inspecting does not carry traffic

•

the fiber is not connected to any light source

If either of these conditions are not met, or if you are unsure, contact your next level of support before going to the next step. —continued—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-27 Procedure 9-6 (continued) Assessing cleanliness of the optical fiber end Step

Action

2

Make sure the fiber is not connected to a circuit pack or an adapter housing. Note: Step 1 confirmed that the fiber, even if connected in a circuit pack or adapter housing, is not carrying traffic or light, so you can safely disconnect the fiber from the circuit pack in order to proceed with the inspection.

3

Select the appropriate fiberscope adapter for the type of optical fiber connector you are inspecting (LC, SC, FC, MT-RJ or MPO).

4

Install the selected adapter on the fiberscope.

5

Insert the optical fiber connector into the fiberscope adapter.

6

Turn the fiberscope light to the ON position.

7

Look into the fiberscope and see Figure 9-4 on page 9-28 to adjust the focus of the fiberscope so that you can identify the four inspection zones of the optical fiber end. If you are inspecting MT-RJ or MPO connectors, select one core and cladding in the connector for your focus. See Figure 9-5 on page 9-29 for MPO connectors, or Figure 9-6 on page 9-29 for MT-RJ connectors.

8

Compare the image of the optical fiber end with Figure 9-7 on page 9-30 and Figure 9-8 on page 9-30.

9

If the image is similar to Figure 9-7 on page 9-30, the optical fiber connector is dirty. Repeat the appropriate cleaning procedure, and then repeat this procedure to assess cleanliness. Note: If the image remains dirty after repeated cleaning, replace the assembly. Send the contaminated assembly to the next level of technical support.

10

If the image is similar to Figure 9-8 on page 9-30, the optical fiber connector is clean. If required, reconnect the fiber immediately on the circuit pack connector where it is supposed to go (the adapter housing should already have been cleaned using the appropriate procedure). If this fiber is not to be connected immediately to a circuit pack, put a dust cap on the fiber to protect it from contamination and damage. Note: When the dust cap is removed from the fiber, the fiber end must be cleaned again.

11

If you are inspecting MT-RJ or MPO connectors, select the next core and cladding for your fiberscope focus and go back to step 8.

If you have inspected all the cores and claddings of the MT-RJ or MPO connector, you have completed this procedure. —end—

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-28 Cleaning connectors Figure 9-4 Inspection zones of the optical fiber end (SC or LC connector types) EX0352

Zone D: Ferrule

Zone B: Cladding Zone A: Core

Zone C: Joint

Legend: Zone A = Zone B = Zone C = Zone D =

Diameter of 25 microns - bigger than physical "core" Diameter of 115 microns - "cladding" Dark zone around the cladding - epoxy White band - ferrule

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Cleaning connectors 9-29 Figure 9-5 Inspection zones of the optical fiber end (MPO connector types) OM1946t

Zone A Zone B Zone C

25 μm 105 μm Zone D

Ferrule

125 μm

Fibers ···

Alignment pins or holes

Figure 9-6 Inspection zones of the optical fiber end (MT-RJ connector types) OM1947t

Zone A Zone B Zone C

25 μm 105 μm Zone D

Ferrule

Fibers

125 μm

Alignment pins or holes

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

9-30 Cleaning connectors Figure 9-7 Dirty optical fiber end OM3056p

Figure 9-8 Clean optical fiber end OM3057p

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

10-1

Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste

10-

This chapter includes the following sections: •

“Overview” on page 10-1

•

“Guidelines” on page 10-2

•

“Illustrations” on page 10-3 — “Compression lugs and cables” on page 10-3 — “Surfaces” on page 10-5

Overview Make sure that you follow the detailed steps regarding antioxidant paste included in various procedures throughout Part 1 and Part 2 of this document. As appropriate, apply antioxidant paste to •

any type of compression lug used with power, ground, and battery cables. For the related illustrations, see “Compression lugs and cables” on page 10-3.

•

the following surfaces — system ground point on the rack — ground terminal — power input and return terminals — battery input and return terminals For the related illustrations, see “Surfaces” on page 10-5.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

10-2 Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste

Guidelines ATTENTION Make sure that you follow the specific detailed steps included in the related procedures in Part 1 and Part 2 of this document. The following serves only as general guidelines. Preparing a cable and compression lugs

1 2

Strip the required amount of insulation from the end of the cable to expose the copper wire. Apply antioxidant paste to the — exposed copper wire of the cable, and — inside the compression lug barrel

3 4 5 6

Insert the prepared exposed copper wire into the prepared compression lug. Crimp the compression lug to the cable as required. Repeat step 1 to step 4 for the other end of the cable, as applicable. Some cables have one compression lug pre-installed. If you are working with a ground cable, see step 7 to step 12. If you are working with a power cable, see step 13 to step 17. If you are working with a battery cable, see step 18 to step 22.

Preparing compression lugs, ground terminal, system ground point, and securing a ground cable

7 8 9

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression lug and the ground terminal. Secure the compression lug to the ground terminal as required. Prepare the system ground point as follows. — If the system ground point has a metallic grounding strip, then lightly coat antioxidant paste on the metallic grounding strip. — If the system ground point does not have a strip metallic grounding, –

it is recommended to remove the paint on the sheet metal, and

–

then lightly coat antioxidant paste on the prepared sheet metal area.

10 Lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression lug on the other end of the ground cable. 11 Place the prepared compression lug up against the metallic grounding strip or the prepared sheet metal area, which connects to the system ground point. 12 Secure the lugged ground cable in place to the system ground point as required. You have completed installing the lugged ground cable with the antioxidant paste, as required.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste 10-3 Preparing compression lugs, power input terminal and return terminal, and securing power cables

13 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression lug and the input terminal on the power component. 14 Place the prepared compression lug up against the input terminal of the power component. 15 Secure the lugged power cable in place to the input terminal of the power component as required. 16 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression lug at the other end of the power cable. Secure this end of the power cable to the appropriate power supply, as required. 17 Repeat step 13 to step 16 for the return power cable. You have completed installing the lugged power cables with the antioxidant paste, as required. Preparing compression lugs, battery input terminal and return terminal, and securing battery cables

18 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression lug and the input terminal on the battery. 19 Place the prepared compression lug up against the input terminal of the battery. 20 Secure the lugged cable in place to the input terminal of the battery as required. 21 If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on the rear of the compression lug at the other end of the battery cable. Secure this end of the battery cable to the appropriate power supply, as required. 22 Repeat step 18 to step 21 for the return battery cable. You have completed installing the lugged battery cables with the antioxidant paste, as required.

Illustrations This section includes illustrations related to the “Guidelines” on page 10-2. •

“Compression lugs and cables” on page 10-3

•

“Surfaces” on page 10-5

Compression lugs and cables This section includes the following: •

Figure 10-1, “Preparing a one-hole compression lug and cable” on page 10-4

•

Figure 10-2, “Preparing a two-hole compression lug and cable” on page 10-4

•

Figure 10-3, “Preparing a ring lug and cable” on page 10-5

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

10-4 Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste Figure 10-1 Preparing a one-hole compression lug and cable OM3591

Lug barrel

0.5 in. (13 mm) Copper wire Crimp-type one-hole lug

Insulated copper wire

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel. 0.5 in. (13 mm)

Figure 10-2 Preparing a two-hole compression lug and cable OM3592

Lug barrel

0.5 in. (13 mm) Copper wire Crimp-type two-hole lug

Insulated copper wire

Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

0.5 in. (13 mm)

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste 10-5 Figure 10-3 Preparing a ring lug and cable OM3593

Strip required amount

Crimp-type 1-hole lug Apply a light coat of antioxidant paste on the stripped copper wire and inside the compression lug barrel.

Surfaces This section includes the following: •

Figure 10-4, “Preparing a two-hole lug and system ground point—Example” on page 10-6

•

Figure 10-5, “Connecting the shelf ground to the rack frame ground” on page 10-7

•

Figure 10-6, “Preparing a two-hole lug and ground terminal” on page 10-7

•

Figure 10-7, “Preparing a two-hole lug and power input terminal” on page 10-8

•

Figure 10-8, “Two-hole lugs connected to battery input and return terminals” on page 10-8

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

10-6 Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste Figure 10-4 Preparing a two-hole lug and system ground point—Example

Compression lug

Lightly coat antioxidant paste on compression lug and a metallic grounding strip that connects to system ground point

GND

GND

Lightly coat antioxidant paste on compression lug and a metallic grounding strip that connects to system ground point

If system ground point does not have a metallic grounding strip, then if necessary remove paint on sheet metal under lug (recommended)

Note: Figure 10-4 also applies to a one-hole lug.

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste 10-7 Figure 10-5 Connecting the shelf ground to the rack frame ground OM1291p.tif

Figure 10-6 Preparing a two-hole lug and ground terminal OM3608

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on compression lug and ground terminal

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

10-8 Appendix A: Applying antioxidant paste Figure 10-7 Preparing a two-hole lug and power input terminal OM3595

If appropriate, lightly coat antioxidant paste on compression lug and input terminal

Note: Figure 10-7 also applies to the power return terminal. Figure 10-8 Two-hole lugs connected to battery input and return terminals OM2707

BATT

RTN Heat shrink tubing

565/5100/5200 Release 11.2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation

Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 323-1701-210 Standard Issue 2 September 2012

565/5100/5200 Installing 5100 Shelves and Components, Part 2 of 2 Copyright© 2011-2012 Ciena® Corporation All Rights Reserved. Release 11.2 Publication: 323-1701-210 Document status: Standard Document issue: 2 Document release date: September 2012 CONTACT CIENA For additional information, office locations, and phone numbers, please visit the Ciena web site at www.ciena.com